瀏覽代碼

Merge remote branch 'origin' into secretlab/next-devicetree

Merging in current state of Linus' tree to deal with merge conflicts and
build failures in vio.c after merge.

Conflicts:
	drivers/i2c/busses/i2c-cpm.c
	drivers/i2c/busses/i2c-mpc.c
	drivers/net/gianfar.c

Also fixed up one line in arch/powerpc/kernel/vio.c to use the
correct node pointer.

Signed-off-by: Grant Likely <grant.likely@secretlab.ca>
Grant Likely 15 年之前
父節點
當前提交
cf9b59e9d3
共有 100 個文件被更改,包括 3813 次插入581 次删除
  1. 2 0
      Documentation/00-INDEX
  2. 31 0
      Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-bus-usb
  3. 29 0
      Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-class-rfkill
  4. 67 0
      Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-rfkill
  5. 40 0
      Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci
  6. 0 28
      Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb
  7. 1 1
      Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory
  8. 9 0
      Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-platform-_UDC_-gadget
  9. 43 0
      Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-picolcd
  10. 29 0
      Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-prodikeys
  11. 111 0
      Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone
  12. 10 0
      Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-wacom
  13. 1 1
      Documentation/Changes
  14. 1 1
      Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt
  15. 1 1
      Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
  16. 839 0
      Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl
  17. 516 176
      Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl
  18. 29 36
      Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl
  19. 11 0
      Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl
  20. 7 3
      Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl
  21. 69 57
      Documentation/DocBook/v4l/compat.xml
  22. 34 2
      Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml
  23. 31 0
      Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-event.xml
  24. 14 4
      Documentation/DocBook/v4l/io.xml
  25. 12 0
      Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml
  26. 3 0
      Documentation/DocBook/v4l/v4l2.xml
  27. 10 0
      Documentation/DocBook/v4l/videodev2.h.xml
  28. 131 0
      Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml
  29. 1 1
      Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-enuminput.xml
  30. 12 2
      Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.xml
  31. 1 1
      Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml
  32. 1 1
      Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-reqbufs.xml
  33. 133 0
      Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml
  34. 17 10
      Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl
  35. 1 1
      Documentation/DocBook/writing_usb_driver.tmpl
  36. 1 1
      Documentation/HOWTO
  37. 2 2
      Documentation/PCI/pci-error-recovery.txt
  38. 13 16
      Documentation/PCI/pcieaer-howto.txt
  39. 71 23
      Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt
  40. 0 10
      Documentation/RCU/torture.txt
  41. 19 16
      Documentation/RCU/trace.txt
  42. 1 1
      Documentation/Smack.txt
  43. 2 0
      Documentation/arm/00-INDEX
  44. 1 1
      Documentation/arm/SA1100/ADSBitsy
  45. 60 0
      Documentation/arm/SPEAr/overview.txt
  46. 1 1
      Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/ADC-LH7-Touchscreen
  47. 1 1
      Documentation/atomic_ops.txt
  48. 1 1
      Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt
  49. 3 3
      Documentation/cachetlb.txt
  50. 133 18
      Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt
  51. 2 3
      Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
  52. 19 19
      Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt
  53. 1 1
      Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt
  54. 1 1
      Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
  55. 1 1
      Documentation/connector/connector.txt
  56. 5 9
      Documentation/credentials.txt
  57. 1 1
      Documentation/dvb/ci.txt
  58. 1 1
      Documentation/dvb/contributors.txt
  59. 84 27
      Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
  60. 2 2
      Documentation/filesystems/Locking
  61. 1 1
      Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt
  62. 1 1
      Documentation/filesystems/ceph.txt
  63. 1 1
      Documentation/filesystems/dlmfs.txt
  64. 13 2
      Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt
  65. 6 6
      Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt
  66. 2 2
      Documentation/filesystems/fuse.txt
  67. 6 6
      Documentation/filesystems/gfs2.txt
  68. 1 1
      Documentation/filesystems/hpfs.txt
  69. 4 4
      Documentation/filesystems/logfs.txt
  70. 1 1
      Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs41-server.txt
  71. 1 1
      Documentation/filesystems/nfs/rpc-cache.txt
  72. 2 2
      Documentation/filesystems/nilfs2.txt
  73. 7 0
      Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt
  74. 8 5
      Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
  75. 1 1
      Documentation/filesystems/smbfs.txt
  76. 42 0
      Documentation/filesystems/sysfs-tagging.txt
  77. 1 1
      Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
  78. 1 1
      Documentation/hwmon/lm85
  79. 7 1
      Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801
  80. 5 0
      Documentation/i2c/writing-clients
  81. 4 4
      Documentation/input/elantech.txt
  82. 1 1
      Documentation/input/joystick.txt
  83. 10 8
      Documentation/intel_txt.txt
  84. 1 1
      Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt
  85. 1 1
      Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt
  86. 5 5
      Documentation/kernel-docs.txt
  87. 46 6
      Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
  88. 3 9
      Documentation/kprobes.txt
  89. 206 2
      Documentation/kvm/api.txt
  90. 42 0
      Documentation/kvm/cpuid.txt
  91. 304 0
      Documentation/kvm/mmu.txt
  92. 1 1
      Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt
  93. 49 17
      Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
  94. 1 1
      Documentation/lguest/lguest.c
  95. 1 1
      Documentation/md.txt
  96. 1 1
      Documentation/netlabel/lsm_interface.txt
  97. 212 0
      Documentation/networking/caif/Linux-CAIF.txt
  98. 109 0
      Documentation/networking/caif/README
  99. 1 1
      Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c
  100. 31 0
      Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt

+ 2 - 0
Documentation/00-INDEX

@@ -250,6 +250,8 @@ numastat.txt
 	- info on how to read Numa policy hit/miss statistics in sysfs.
 	- info on how to read Numa policy hit/miss statistics in sysfs.
 oops-tracing.txt
 oops-tracing.txt
 	- how to decode those nasty internal kernel error dump messages.
 	- how to decode those nasty internal kernel error dump messages.
+padata.txt
+	- An introduction to the "padata" parallel execution API
 parisc/
 parisc/
 	- directory with info on using Linux on PA-RISC architecture.
 	- directory with info on using Linux on PA-RISC architecture.
 parport.txt
 parport.txt

+ 31 - 0
Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-bus-usb

@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/level
+Date:		March 2007
+KernelVersion:	2.6.21
+Contact:	Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
+Description:
+		Each USB device directory will contain a file named
+		power/level.  This file holds a power-level setting for
+		the device, either "on" or "auto".
+
+		"on" means that the device is not allowed to autosuspend,
+		although normal suspends for system sleep will still
+		be honored.  "auto" means the device will autosuspend
+		and autoresume in the usual manner, according to the
+		capabilities of its driver.
+
+		During normal use, devices should be left in the "auto"
+		level.  The "on" level is meant for administrative uses.
+		If you want to suspend a device immediately but leave it
+		free to wake up in response to I/O requests, you should
+		write "0" to power/autosuspend.
+
+		Device not capable of proper suspend and resume should be
+		left in the "on" level.  Although the USB spec requires
+		devices to support suspend/resume, many of them do not.
+		In fact so many don't that by default, the USB core
+		initializes all non-hub devices in the "on" level.  Some
+		drivers may change this setting when they are bound.
+
+		This file is deprecated and will be removed after 2010.
+		Use the power/control file instead; it does exactly the
+		same thing.

+ 29 - 0
Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-class-rfkill

@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+rfkill - radio frequency (RF) connector kill switch support
+
+For details to this subsystem look at Documentation/rfkill.txt.
+
+What:		/sys/class/rfkill/rfkill[0-9]+/state
+Date:		09-Jul-2007
+KernelVersion	v2.6.22
+Contact:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
+Description: 	Current state of the transmitter.
+		This file is deprecated and sheduled to be removed in 2014,
+		because its not possible to express the 'soft and hard block'
+		state of the rfkill driver.
+Values: 	A numeric value.
+		0: RFKILL_STATE_SOFT_BLOCKED
+			transmitter is turned off by software
+		1: RFKILL_STATE_UNBLOCKED
+			transmitter is (potentially) active
+		2: RFKILL_STATE_HARD_BLOCKED
+			transmitter is forced off by something outside of
+			the driver's control.
+
+What:		/sys/class/rfkill/rfkill[0-9]+/claim
+Date:		09-Jul-2007
+KernelVersion	v2.6.22
+Contact:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	This file is deprecated because there no longer is a way to
+		claim just control over a single rfkill instance.
+		This file is scheduled to be removed in 2012.
+Values: 	0: Kernel handles events

+ 67 - 0
Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-rfkill

@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+rfkill - radio frequency (RF) connector kill switch support
+
+For details to this subsystem look at Documentation/rfkill.txt.
+
+For the deprecated /sys/class/rfkill/*/state and
+/sys/class/rfkill/*/claim knobs of this interface look in
+Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-class-rfkill.
+
+What: 		/sys/class/rfkill
+Date:		09-Jul-2007
+KernelVersion:	v2.6.22
+Contact:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org,
+Description: 	The rfkill class subsystem folder.
+		Each registered rfkill driver is represented by an rfkillX
+		subfolder (X being an integer > 0).
+
+
+What:		/sys/class/rfkill/rfkill[0-9]+/name
+Date:		09-Jul-2007
+KernelVersion	v2.6.22
+Contact:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
+Description: 	Name assigned by driver to this key (interface or driver name).
+Values: 	arbitrary string.
+
+
+What: 		/sys/class/rfkill/rfkill[0-9]+/type
+Date:		09-Jul-2007
+KernelVersion	v2.6.22
+Contact:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
+Description: 	Driver type string ("wlan", "bluetooth", etc).
+Values: 	See include/linux/rfkill.h.
+
+
+What:		/sys/class/rfkill/rfkill[0-9]+/persistent
+Date:		09-Jul-2007
+KernelVersion	v2.6.22
+Contact:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
+Description: 	Whether the soft blocked state is initialised from non-volatile
+		storage at startup.
+Values: 	A numeric value.
+		0: false
+		1: true
+
+
+What:		/sys/class/rfkill/rfkill[0-9]+/hard
+Date:		12-March-2010
+KernelVersion	v2.6.34
+Contact:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
+Description: 	Current hardblock state. This file is read only.
+Values: 	A numeric value.
+		0: inactive
+			The transmitter is (potentially) active.
+		1: active
+			The transmitter is forced off by something outside of
+			the driver's control.
+
+
+What:		/sys/class/rfkill/rfkill[0-9]+/soft
+Date:		12-March-2010
+KernelVersion	v2.6.34
+Contact:	linux-wireless@vger.kernel.org
+Description:	Current softblock state. This file is read and write.
+Values: 	A numeric value.
+		0: inactive
+			The transmitter is (potentially) active.
+		1: active
+			The transmitter is turned off by software.

+ 40 - 0
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci

@@ -133,6 +133,46 @@ Description:
 		The symbolic link points to the PCI device sysfs entry of the
 		The symbolic link points to the PCI device sysfs entry of the
 		Physical Function this device associates with.
 		Physical Function this device associates with.
 
 
+
+What:		/sys/bus/pci/slots/...
+Date:		April 2005 (possibly older)
+KernelVersion:	2.6.12 (possibly older)
+Contact:	linux-pci@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		When the appropriate driver is loaded, it will create a
+		directory per claimed physical PCI slot in
+		/sys/bus/pci/slots/.  The names of these directories are
+		specific to the driver, which in turn, are specific to the
+		platform, but in general, should match the label on the
+		machine's physical chassis.
+
+		The drivers that can create slot directories include the
+		PCI hotplug drivers, and as of 2.6.27, the pci_slot driver.
+
+		The slot directories contain, at a minimum, a file named
+		'address' which contains the PCI bus:device:function tuple.
+		Other files may appear as well, but are specific to the
+		driver.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/pci/slots/.../function[0-7]
+Date:		March 2010
+KernelVersion:	2.6.35
+Contact:	linux-pci@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		If PCI slot directories (as described above) are created,
+		and the physical slot is actually populated with a device,
+		symbolic links in the slot directory pointing to the
+		device's PCI functions are created as well.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/pci/devices/.../slot
+Date:		March 2010
+KernelVersion:	2.6.35
+Contact:	linux-pci@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		If PCI slot directories (as described above) are created,
+		a symbolic link pointing to the slot directory will be
+		created as well.
+
 What:		/sys/bus/pci/slots/.../module
 What:		/sys/bus/pci/slots/.../module
 Date:		June 2009
 Date:		June 2009
 Contact:	linux-pci@vger.kernel.org
 Contact:	linux-pci@vger.kernel.org

+ 0 - 28
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb

@@ -14,34 +14,6 @@ Description:
 		The autosuspend delay for newly-created devices is set to
 		The autosuspend delay for newly-created devices is set to
 		the value of the usbcore.autosuspend module parameter.
 		the value of the usbcore.autosuspend module parameter.
 
 
-What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/level
-Date:		March 2007
-KernelVersion:	2.6.21
-Contact:	Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
-Description:
-		Each USB device directory will contain a file named
-		power/level.  This file holds a power-level setting for
-		the device, either "on" or "auto".
-
-		"on" means that the device is not allowed to autosuspend,
-		although normal suspends for system sleep will still
-		be honored.  "auto" means the device will autosuspend
-		and autoresume in the usual manner, according to the
-		capabilities of its driver.
-
-		During normal use, devices should be left in the "auto"
-		level.  The "on" level is meant for administrative uses.
-		If you want to suspend a device immediately but leave it
-		free to wake up in response to I/O requests, you should
-		write "0" to power/autosuspend.
-
-		Device not capable of proper suspend and resume should be
-		left in the "on" level.  Although the USB spec requires
-		devices to support suspend/resume, many of them do not.
-		In fact so many don't that by default, the USB core
-		initializes all non-hub devices in the "on" level.  Some
-		drivers may change this setting when they are bound.
-
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/persist
 What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/.../power/persist
 Date:		May 2007
 Date:		May 2007
 KernelVersion:	2.6.23
 KernelVersion:	2.6.23

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory

@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ Date:		September 2008
 Contact:	Badari Pulavarty <pbadari@us.ibm.com>
 Contact:	Badari Pulavarty <pbadari@us.ibm.com>
 Description:
 Description:
 		The file /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/state
 		The file /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/state
-		is read-write.  When read, it's contents show the
+		is read-write.  When read, its contents show the
 		online/offline state of the memory section.  When written,
 		online/offline state of the memory section.  When written,
 		root can toggle the the online/offline state of a removable
 		root can toggle the the online/offline state of a removable
 		memory section (see removable file description above)
 		memory section (see removable file description above)

+ 9 - 0
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-platform-_UDC_-gadget

@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/_UDC_/gadget/suspended
+Date:		April 2010
+Contact:	Fabien Chouteau <fabien.chouteau@barco.com>
+Description:
+		Show the suspend state of an USB composite gadget.
+		1 -> suspended
+		0 -> resumed
+
+		(_UDC_ is the name of the USB Device Controller driver)

+ 43 - 0
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-picolcd

@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/operation_mode
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Bruno Prémont <bonbons@linux-vserver.org>
+Description:	Make it possible to switch the PicoLCD device between LCD
+		(firmware) and bootloader (flasher) operation modes.
+
+		Reading: returns list of available modes, the active mode being
+		enclosed in brackets ('[' and ']')
+
+		Writing: causes operation mode switch. Permitted values are
+		the non-active mode names listed when read.
+
+		Note: when switching mode the current PicoLCD HID device gets
+		disconnected and reconnects after above delay (see attribute
+		operation_mode_delay for its value).
+
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/operation_mode_delay
+Date:		April 2010
+Contact:	Bruno Prémont <bonbons@linux-vserver.org>
+Description:	Delay PicoLCD waits before restarting in new mode when
+		operation_mode has changed.
+
+		Reading/Writing: It is expressed in ms and permitted range is
+		0..30000ms.
+
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/fb_update_rate
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Bruno Prémont <bonbons@linux-vserver.org>
+Description:	Make it possible to adjust defio refresh rate.
+
+		Reading: returns list of available refresh rates (expressed in Hz),
+		the active refresh rate being enclosed in brackets ('[' and ']')
+
+		Writing: accepts new refresh rate expressed in integer Hz
+		within permitted rates.
+
+		Note: As device can barely do 2 complete refreshes a second
+		it only makes sense to adjust this value if only one or two
+		tiles get changed and it's not appropriate to expect the application
+		to flush it's tiny changes explicitely at higher than default rate.
+

+ 29 - 0
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-prodikeys

@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/hid/drivers/prodikeys/.../channel
+Date:		April 2010
+KernelVersion:	2.6.34
+Contact:	Don Prince <dhprince.devel@yahoo.co.uk>
+Description:
+		Allows control (via software) the midi channel to which
+		that the pc-midi keyboard will output.midi data.
+		Range: 0..15
+		Type:  Read/write
+What:		/sys/bus/hid/drivers/prodikeys/.../sustain
+Date:		April 2010
+KernelVersion:	2.6.34
+Contact:	Don Prince <dhprince.devel@yahoo.co.uk>
+Description:
+		Allows control (via software) the sustain duration of a
+		note held by the pc-midi driver.
+		0 means sustain mode is disabled.
+		Range: 0..5000 (milliseconds)
+		Type:  Read/write
+What:		/sys/bus/hid/drivers/prodikeys/.../octave
+Date:		April 2010
+KernelVersion:	2.6.34
+Contact:	Don Prince <dhprince.devel@yahoo.co.uk>
+Description:
+		Controls the octave shift modifier in the pc-midi driver.
+		The octave can be shifted via software up/down 2 octaves.
+		0 means the no ocatve shift.
+		Range: -2..2 (minus 2 to plus 2)
+		Type: Read/Write

+ 111 - 0
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone

@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/actual_dpi
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	It is possible to switch the dpi setting of the mouse with the
+		press of a button.
+		When read, this file returns the raw number of the actual dpi
+		setting reported by the mouse. This number has to be further
+		processed to receive the real dpi value.
+
+		VALUE DPI
+		1     800
+		2     1200
+		3     1600
+		4     2000
+		5     2400
+		6     3200
+
+		This file is readonly.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/actual_profile
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile.
+		This file is readonly.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/firmware_version
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
+		firmware reported by the mouse. Using the integer value eases
+		further usage in other programs. To receive the real version
+		number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the
+		left. E.g. a returned value of 138 means 1.38
+		This file is readonly.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/kone_driver_version
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When read, this file returns the driver version.
+		The format of the string is "v<major>.<minor>.<patchlevel>".
+		This attribute is used by the userland tools to find the sysfs-
+		paths of installed kone-mice and determine the capabilites of
+		the driver. Versions of this driver for old kernels replace
+		usbhid instead of generic-usb. The way to scan for this file
+		has been chosen to provide a consistent way for all supported
+		kernel versions.
+		This file is readonly.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/profile[1-5]
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
+                press of a button. A profile holds informations like button
+                mappings, sensitivity, the colors of the 5 leds and light
+                effects.
+                When read, these files return the respective profile. The
+                returned data is 975 bytes in size.
+		When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
+		data back to the mouse. The data has to be 975 bytes long.
+		The mouse will reject invalid data, whereas the profile number
+		stored in the profile doesn't need to fit the number of the
+		store.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/settings
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse.
+		The size of the data is 36 bytes and holds information like the
+		startup_profile, tcu state and calibration_data.
+		When written, this file lets write settings back to the mouse.
+		The data has to be 36 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid
+		data.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/startup_profile
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1 to 5.
+                When read, this attribute returns the number of the profile
+                that's active when the mouse is powered on.
+		When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile
+		and the mouse activates this profile immediately.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/tcu
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse has a "Tracking Control Unit" which lets the user
+		calibrate the laser power to fit the mousepad surface.
+		When read, this file returns the current state of the TCU,
+		where 0 means off and 1 means on.
+		Writing 0 in this file will switch the TCU off.
+		Writing 1 in this file will start the calibration which takes
+		around 6 seconds to complete and activates the TCU.
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/weight
+Date:		March 2010
+Contact:	Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
+Description:	The mouse can be equipped with one of four supplied weights
+		ranging from 5 to 20 grams which are recognized by the mouse
+		and its value can be read out. When read, this file returns the
+		raw value returned by the mouse which eases further processing
+		in other software.
+		The values map to the weights as follows:
+
+		VALUE WEIGHT
+		0     none
+		1     5g
+		2     10g
+		3     15g
+		4     20g
+
+		This file is readonly.

+ 10 - 0
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-wacom

@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+What:		/sys/class/hidraw/hidraw*/device/speed
+Date:		April 2010
+Kernel Version:	2.6.35
+Contact:	linux-bluetooth@vger.kernel.org
+Description:
+		The /sys/class/hidraw/hidraw*/device/speed file controls
+		reporting speed of wacom bluetooth tablet. Reading from
+		this file returns 1 if tablet reports in high speed mode
+		or 0 otherwise. Writing to this file one of these values
+		switches reporting speed.

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/Changes

@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ o  oprofile               0.9                     # oprofiled --version
 o  udev                   081                     # udevinfo -V
 o  udev                   081                     # udevinfo -V
 o  grub                   0.93                    # grub --version
 o  grub                   0.93                    # grub --version
 o  mcelog		  0.6
 o  mcelog		  0.6
-o  iptables               1.4.1                   # iptables -V
+o  iptables               1.4.2                   # iptables -V
 
 
 
 
 Kernel compilation
 Kernel compilation

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt

@@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ failure can be determined by:
 
 
 			   Closing
 			   Closing
 
 
-This document, and the API itself, would not be in it's current
+This document, and the API itself, would not be in its current
 form without the feedback and suggestions from numerous individuals.
 form without the feedback and suggestions from numerous individuals.
 We would like to specifically mention, in no particular order, the
 We would like to specifically mention, in no particular order, the
 following people:
 following people:

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/DocBook/Makefile

@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ DOCBOOKS := z8530book.xml mcabook.xml device-drivers.xml \
 	    genericirq.xml s390-drivers.xml uio-howto.xml scsi.xml \
 	    genericirq.xml s390-drivers.xml uio-howto.xml scsi.xml \
 	    mac80211.xml debugobjects.xml sh.xml regulator.xml \
 	    mac80211.xml debugobjects.xml sh.xml regulator.xml \
 	    alsa-driver-api.xml writing-an-alsa-driver.xml \
 	    alsa-driver-api.xml writing-an-alsa-driver.xml \
-	    tracepoint.xml media.xml
+	    tracepoint.xml media.xml drm.xml
 
 
 ###
 ###
 # The build process is as follows (targets):
 # The build process is as follows (targets):

+ 839 - 0
Documentation/DocBook/drm.tmpl

@@ -0,0 +1,839 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
+	"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
+
+<book id="drmDevelopersGuide">
+  <bookinfo>
+    <title>Linux DRM Developer's Guide</title>
+
+    <copyright>
+      <year>2008-2009</year>
+      <holder>
+	Intel Corporation (Jesse Barnes &lt;jesse.barnes@intel.com&gt;)
+      </holder>
+    </copyright>
+
+    <legalnotice>
+      <para>
+	The contents of this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+	General Public License version 2 (the "GPL") as distributed in
+	the kernel source COPYING file.
+      </para>
+    </legalnotice>
+  </bookinfo>
+
+<toc></toc>
+
+  <!-- Introduction -->
+
+  <chapter id="drmIntroduction">
+    <title>Introduction</title>
+    <para>
+      The Linux DRM layer contains code intended to support the needs
+      of complex graphics devices, usually containing programmable
+      pipelines well suited to 3D graphics acceleration.  Graphics
+      drivers in the kernel can make use of DRM functions to make
+      tasks like memory management, interrupt handling and DMA easier,
+      and provide a uniform interface to applications.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      A note on versions: this guide covers features found in the DRM
+      tree, including the TTM memory manager, output configuration and
+      mode setting, and the new vblank internals, in addition to all
+      the regular features found in current kernels.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      [Insert diagram of typical DRM stack here]
+    </para>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <!-- Internals -->
+
+  <chapter id="drmInternals">
+    <title>DRM Internals</title>
+    <para>
+      This chapter documents DRM internals relevant to driver authors
+      and developers working to add support for the latest features to
+      existing drivers.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      First, we'll go over some typical driver initialization
+      requirements, like setting up command buffers, creating an
+      initial output configuration, and initializing core services.
+      Subsequent sections will cover core internals in more detail,
+      providing implementation notes and examples.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      The DRM layer provides several services to graphics drivers,
+      many of them driven by the application interfaces it provides
+      through libdrm, the library that wraps most of the DRM ioctls.
+      These include vblank event handling, memory
+      management, output management, framebuffer management, command
+      submission &amp; fencing, suspend/resume support, and DMA
+      services.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      The core of every DRM driver is struct drm_device.  Drivers
+      will typically statically initialize a drm_device structure,
+      then pass it to drm_init() at load time.
+    </para>
+
+  <!-- Internals: driver init -->
+
+  <sect1>
+    <title>Driver initialization</title>
+    <para>
+      Before calling the DRM initialization routines, the driver must
+      first create and fill out a struct drm_device structure.
+    </para>
+    <programlisting>
+      static struct drm_driver driver = {
+	/* don't use mtrr's here, the Xserver or user space app should
+	 * deal with them for intel hardware.
+	 */
+	.driver_features =
+	    DRIVER_USE_AGP | DRIVER_REQUIRE_AGP |
+	    DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ | DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED | DRIVER_MODESET,
+	.load = i915_driver_load,
+	.unload = i915_driver_unload,
+	.firstopen = i915_driver_firstopen,
+	.lastclose = i915_driver_lastclose,
+	.preclose = i915_driver_preclose,
+	.save = i915_save,
+	.restore = i915_restore,
+	.device_is_agp = i915_driver_device_is_agp,
+	.get_vblank_counter = i915_get_vblank_counter,
+	.enable_vblank = i915_enable_vblank,
+	.disable_vblank = i915_disable_vblank,
+	.irq_preinstall = i915_driver_irq_preinstall,
+	.irq_postinstall = i915_driver_irq_postinstall,
+	.irq_uninstall = i915_driver_irq_uninstall,
+	.irq_handler = i915_driver_irq_handler,
+	.reclaim_buffers = drm_core_reclaim_buffers,
+	.get_map_ofs = drm_core_get_map_ofs,
+	.get_reg_ofs = drm_core_get_reg_ofs,
+	.fb_probe = intelfb_probe,
+	.fb_remove = intelfb_remove,
+	.fb_resize = intelfb_resize,
+	.master_create = i915_master_create,
+	.master_destroy = i915_master_destroy,
+#if defined(CONFIG_DEBUG_FS)
+	.debugfs_init = i915_debugfs_init,
+	.debugfs_cleanup = i915_debugfs_cleanup,
+#endif
+	.gem_init_object = i915_gem_init_object,
+	.gem_free_object = i915_gem_free_object,
+	.gem_vm_ops = &amp;i915_gem_vm_ops,
+	.ioctls = i915_ioctls,
+	.fops = {
+		.owner = THIS_MODULE,
+		.open = drm_open,
+		.release = drm_release,
+		.ioctl = drm_ioctl,
+		.mmap = drm_mmap,
+		.poll = drm_poll,
+		.fasync = drm_fasync,
+#ifdef CONFIG_COMPAT
+		.compat_ioctl = i915_compat_ioctl,
+#endif
+		},
+	.pci_driver = {
+		.name = DRIVER_NAME,
+		.id_table = pciidlist,
+		.probe = probe,
+		.remove = __devexit_p(drm_cleanup_pci),
+		},
+	.name = DRIVER_NAME,
+	.desc = DRIVER_DESC,
+	.date = DRIVER_DATE,
+	.major = DRIVER_MAJOR,
+	.minor = DRIVER_MINOR,
+	.patchlevel = DRIVER_PATCHLEVEL,
+      };
+    </programlisting>
+    <para>
+      In the example above, taken from the i915 DRM driver, the driver
+      sets several flags indicating what core features it supports.
+      We'll go over the individual callbacks in later sections.  Since
+      flags indicate which features your driver supports to the DRM
+      core, you need to set most of them prior to calling drm_init().  Some,
+      like DRIVER_MODESET can be set later based on user supplied parameters,
+      but that's the exception rather than the rule.
+    </para>
+    <variablelist>
+      <title>Driver flags</title>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_USE_AGP</term>
+	<listitem><para>
+	    Driver uses AGP interface
+	</para></listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_REQUIRE_AGP</term>
+	<listitem><para>
+	    Driver needs AGP interface to function.
+	</para></listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_USE_MTRR</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Driver uses MTRR interface for mapping memory.  Deprecated.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_PCI_DMA</term>
+	<listitem><para>
+	    Driver is capable of PCI DMA.  Deprecated.
+	</para></listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_SG</term>
+	<listitem><para>
+	    Driver can perform scatter/gather DMA.  Deprecated.
+	</para></listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_HAVE_DMA</term>
+	<listitem><para>Driver supports DMA.  Deprecated.</para></listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ</term><term>DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    DRIVER_HAVE_IRQ indicates whether the driver has a IRQ
+	    handler, DRIVER_IRQ_SHARED indicates whether the device &amp;
+	    handler support shared IRQs (note that this is required of
+	    PCI drivers).
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_DMA_QUEUE</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    If the driver queues DMA requests and completes them
+	    asynchronously, this flag should be set.  Deprecated.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_FB_DMA</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Driver supports DMA to/from the framebuffer.  Deprecated.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term>DRIVER_MODESET</term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>
+	    Driver supports mode setting interfaces.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+    <para>
+      In this specific case, the driver requires AGP and supports
+      IRQs.  DMA, as we'll see, is handled by device specific ioctls
+      in this case.  It also supports the kernel mode setting APIs, though
+      unlike in the actual i915 driver source, this example unconditionally
+      exports KMS capability.
+    </para>
+  </sect1>
+
+  <!-- Internals: driver load -->
+
+  <sect1>
+    <title>Driver load</title>
+    <para>
+      In the previous section, we saw what a typical drm_driver
+      structure might look like.  One of the more important fields in
+      the structure is the hook for the load function.
+    </para>
+    <programlisting>
+      static struct drm_driver driver = {
+      	...
+      	.load = i915_driver_load,
+        ...
+      };
+    </programlisting>
+    <para>
+      The load function has many responsibilities: allocating a driver
+      private structure, specifying supported performance counters,
+      configuring the device (e.g. mapping registers &amp; command
+      buffers), initializing the memory manager, and setting up the
+      initial output configuration.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      Note that the tasks performed at driver load time must not
+      conflict with DRM client requirements.  For instance, if user
+      level mode setting drivers are in use, it would be problematic
+      to perform output discovery &amp; configuration at load time.
+      Likewise, if pre-memory management aware user level drivers are
+      in use, memory management and command buffer setup may need to
+      be omitted.  These requirements are driver specific, and care
+      needs to be taken to keep both old and new applications and
+      libraries working.  The i915 driver supports the "modeset"
+      module parameter to control whether advanced features are
+      enabled at load time or in legacy fashion.  If compatibility is
+      a concern (e.g. with drivers converted over to the new interfaces
+      from the old ones), care must be taken to prevent incompatible
+      device initialization and control with the currently active
+      userspace drivers.
+    </para>
+
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Driver private &amp; performance counters</title>
+      <para>
+	The driver private hangs off the main drm_device structure and
+	can be used for tracking various device specific bits of
+	information, like register offsets, command buffer status,
+	register state for suspend/resume, etc.  At load time, a
+	driver can simply allocate one and set drm_device.dev_priv
+	appropriately; at unload the driver can free it and set
+	drm_device.dev_priv to NULL.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	The DRM supports several counters which can be used for rough
+	performance characterization.  Note that the DRM stat counter
+	system is not often used by applications, and supporting
+	additional counters is completely optional.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	These interfaces are deprecated and should not be used.  If performance
+	monitoring is desired, the developer should investigate and
+	potentially enhance the kernel perf and tracing infrastructure to export
+	GPU related performance information to performance monitoring
+	tools and applications.
+      </para>
+    </sect2>
+
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Configuring the device</title>
+      <para>
+	Obviously, device configuration will be device specific.
+	However, there are several common operations: finding a
+	device's PCI resources, mapping them, and potentially setting
+	up an IRQ handler.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	Finding &amp; mapping resources is fairly straightforward.  The
+	DRM wrapper functions, drm_get_resource_start() and
+	drm_get_resource_len() can be used to find BARs on the given
+	drm_device struct.  Once those values have been retrieved, the
+	driver load function can call drm_addmap() to create a new
+	mapping for the BAR in question.  Note you'll probably want a
+	drm_local_map_t in your driver private structure to track any
+	mappings you create.
+<!-- !Fdrivers/gpu/drm/drm_bufs.c drm_get_resource_* -->
+<!-- !Finclude/drm/drmP.h drm_local_map_t -->
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	if compatibility with other operating systems isn't a concern
+	(DRM drivers can run under various BSD variants and OpenSolaris),
+	native Linux calls can be used for the above, e.g. pci_resource_*
+	and iomap*/iounmap.  See the Linux device driver book for more
+	info.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	Once you have a register map, you can use the DRM_READn() and
+	DRM_WRITEn() macros to access the registers on your device, or
+	use driver specific versions to offset into your MMIO space
+	relative to a driver specific base pointer (see I915_READ for
+	example).
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	If your device supports interrupt generation, you may want to
+	setup an interrupt handler at driver load time as well.  This
+	is done using the drm_irq_install() function.  If your device
+	supports vertical blank interrupts, it should call
+	drm_vblank_init() to initialize the core vblank handling code before
+	enabling interrupts on your device.  This ensures the vblank related
+	structures are allocated and allows the core to handle vblank events.
+      </para>
+<!--!Fdrivers/char/drm/drm_irq.c drm_irq_install-->
+      <para>
+	Once your interrupt handler is registered (it'll use your
+	drm_driver.irq_handler as the actual interrupt handling
+	function), you can safely enable interrupts on your device,
+	assuming any other state your interrupt handler uses is also
+	initialized.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	Another task that may be necessary during configuration is
+	mapping the video BIOS.  On many devices, the VBIOS describes
+	device configuration, LCD panel timings (if any), and contains
+	flags indicating device state.  Mapping the BIOS can be done
+	using the pci_map_rom() call, a convenience function that
+	takes care of mapping the actual ROM, whether it has been
+	shadowed into memory (typically at address 0xc0000) or exists
+	on the PCI device in the ROM BAR.  Note that once you've
+	mapped the ROM and extracted any necessary information, be
+	sure to unmap it; on many devices the ROM address decoder is
+	shared with other BARs, so leaving it mapped can cause
+	undesired behavior like hangs or memory corruption.
+<!--!Fdrivers/pci/rom.c pci_map_rom-->
+      </para>
+    </sect2>
+
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Memory manager initialization</title>
+      <para>
+	In order to allocate command buffers, cursor memory, scanout
+	buffers, etc., as well as support the latest features provided
+	by packages like Mesa and the X.Org X server, your driver
+	should support a memory manager.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	If your driver supports memory management (it should!), you'll
+	need to set that up at load time as well.  How you intialize
+	it depends on which memory manager you're using, TTM or GEM.
+      </para>
+      <sect3>
+	<title>TTM initialization</title>
+	<para>
+	  TTM (for Translation Table Manager) manages video memory and
+	  aperture space for graphics devices. TTM supports both UMA devices
+	  and devices with dedicated video RAM (VRAM), i.e. most discrete
+	  graphics devices.  If your device has dedicated RAM, supporting
+	  TTM is desireable.  TTM also integrates tightly with your
+	  driver specific buffer execution function.  See the radeon
+	  driver for examples.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	  The core TTM structure is the ttm_bo_driver struct.  It contains
+	  several fields with function pointers for initializing the TTM,
+	  allocating and freeing memory, waiting for command completion
+	  and fence synchronization, and memory migration.  See the
+	  radeon_ttm.c file for an example of usage.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	  The ttm_global_reference structure is made up of several fields:
+	</para>
+	<programlisting>
+	  struct ttm_global_reference {
+	  	enum ttm_global_types global_type;
+	  	size_t size;
+	  	void *object;
+	  	int (*init) (struct ttm_global_reference *);
+	  	void (*release) (struct ttm_global_reference *);
+	  };
+	</programlisting>
+	<para>
+	  There should be one global reference structure for your memory
+	  manager as a whole, and there will be others for each object
+	  created by the memory manager at runtime.  Your global TTM should
+	  have a type of TTM_GLOBAL_TTM_MEM.  The size field for the global
+	  object should be sizeof(struct ttm_mem_global), and the init and
+	  release hooks should point at your driver specific init and
+	  release routines, which will probably eventually call
+	  ttm_mem_global_init and ttm_mem_global_release respectively.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	  Once your global TTM accounting structure is set up and initialized
+	  (done by calling ttm_global_item_ref on the global object you
+	  just created), you'll need to create a buffer object TTM to
+	  provide a pool for buffer object allocation by clients and the
+	  kernel itself.  The type of this object should be TTM_GLOBAL_TTM_BO,
+	  and its size should be sizeof(struct ttm_bo_global).  Again,
+	  driver specific init and release functions can be provided,
+	  likely eventually calling ttm_bo_global_init and
+	  ttm_bo_global_release, respectively.  Also like the previous
+	  object, ttm_global_item_ref is used to create an initial reference
+	  count for the TTM, which will call your initalization function.
+	</para>
+      </sect3>
+      <sect3>
+	<title>GEM initialization</title>
+	<para>
+	  GEM is an alternative to TTM, designed specifically for UMA
+	  devices.  It has simpler initialization and execution requirements
+	  than TTM, but has no VRAM management capability.  Core GEM
+	  initialization is comprised of a basic drm_mm_init call to create
+	  a GTT DRM MM object, which provides an address space pool for
+	  object allocation.  In a KMS configuration, the driver will
+	  need to allocate and initialize a command ring buffer following
+	  basic GEM initialization.  Most UMA devices have a so-called
+	  "stolen" memory region, which provides space for the initial
+	  framebuffer and large, contiguous memory regions required by the
+	  device.  This space is not typically managed by GEM, and must
+	  be initialized separately into its own DRM MM object.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	  Initialization will be driver specific, and will depend on
+	  the architecture of the device.  In the case of Intel
+	  integrated graphics chips like 965GM, GEM initialization can
+	  be done by calling the internal GEM init function,
+	  i915_gem_do_init().  Since the 965GM is a UMA device
+	  (i.e. it doesn't have dedicated VRAM), GEM will manage
+	  making regular RAM available for GPU operations.  Memory set
+	  aside by the BIOS (called "stolen" memory by the i915
+	  driver) will be managed by the DRM memrange allocator; the
+	  rest of the aperture will be managed by GEM.
+	  <programlisting>
+	    /* Basic memrange allocator for stolen space (aka vram) */
+	    drm_memrange_init(&amp;dev_priv->vram, 0, prealloc_size);
+	    /* Let GEM Manage from end of prealloc space to end of aperture */
+	    i915_gem_do_init(dev, prealloc_size, agp_size);
+	  </programlisting>
+<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_memrange.c-->
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	  Once the memory manager has been set up, we can allocate the
+	  command buffer.  In the i915 case, this is also done with a
+	  GEM function, i915_gem_init_ringbuffer().
+	</para>
+      </sect3>
+    </sect2>
+
+    <sect2>
+      <title>Output configuration</title>
+      <para>
+	The final initialization task is output configuration.  This involves
+	finding and initializing the CRTCs, encoders and connectors
+	for your device, creating an initial configuration and
+	registering a framebuffer console driver.
+      </para>
+      <sect3>
+	<title>Output discovery and initialization</title>
+	<para>
+	  Several core functions exist to create CRTCs, encoders and
+	  connectors, namely drm_crtc_init(), drm_connector_init() and
+	  drm_encoder_init(), along with several "helper" functions to
+	  perform common tasks.
+	</para>
+	<para>
+	  Connectors should be registered with sysfs once they've been
+	  detected and initialized, using the
+	  drm_sysfs_connector_add() function.  Likewise, when they're
+	  removed from the system, they should be destroyed with
+	  drm_sysfs_connector_remove().
+	</para>
+	<programlisting>
+<![CDATA[
+void intel_crt_init(struct drm_device *dev)
+{
+	struct drm_connector *connector;
+	struct intel_output *intel_output;
+
+	intel_output = kzalloc(sizeof(struct intel_output), GFP_KERNEL);
+	if (!intel_output)
+		return;
+
+	connector = &intel_output->base;
+	drm_connector_init(dev, &intel_output->base,
+			   &intel_crt_connector_funcs, DRM_MODE_CONNECTOR_VGA);
+
+	drm_encoder_init(dev, &intel_output->enc, &intel_crt_enc_funcs,
+			 DRM_MODE_ENCODER_DAC);
+
+	drm_mode_connector_attach_encoder(&intel_output->base,
+					  &intel_output->enc);
+
+	/* Set up the DDC bus. */
+	intel_output->ddc_bus = intel_i2c_create(dev, GPIOA, "CRTDDC_A");
+	if (!intel_output->ddc_bus) {
+		dev_printk(KERN_ERR, &dev->pdev->dev, "DDC bus registration "
+			   "failed.\n");
+		return;
+	}
+
+	intel_output->type = INTEL_OUTPUT_ANALOG;
+	connector->interlace_allowed = 0;
+	connector->doublescan_allowed = 0;
+
+	drm_encoder_helper_add(&intel_output->enc, &intel_crt_helper_funcs);
+	drm_connector_helper_add(connector, &intel_crt_connector_helper_funcs);
+
+	drm_sysfs_connector_add(connector);
+}
+]]>
+	</programlisting>
+	<para>
+	  In the example above (again, taken from the i915 driver), a
+	  CRT connector and encoder combination is created.  A device
+	  specific i2c bus is also created, for fetching EDID data and
+	  performing monitor detection.  Once the process is complete,
+	  the new connector is regsitered with sysfs, to make its
+	  properties available to applications.
+	</para>
+	<sect4>
+	  <title>Helper functions and core functions</title>
+	  <para>
+	    Since many PC-class graphics devices have similar display output
+	    designs, the DRM provides a set of helper functions to make
+	    output management easier.  The core helper routines handle
+	    encoder re-routing and disabling of unused functions following
+	    mode set.  Using the helpers is optional, but recommended for
+	    devices with PC-style architectures (i.e. a set of display planes
+	    for feeding pixels to encoders which are in turn routed to
+	    connectors).  Devices with more complex requirements needing
+	    finer grained management can opt to use the core callbacks
+	    directly.
+	  </para>
+	  <para>
+	    [Insert typical diagram here.]  [Insert OMAP style config here.]
+	  </para>
+	</sect4>
+	<para>
+	  For each encoder, CRTC and connector, several functions must
+	  be provided, depending on the object type.  Encoder objects
+	  need should provide a DPMS (basically on/off) function, mode fixup
+	  (for converting requested modes into native hardware timings),
+	  and prepare, set and commit functions for use by the core DRM
+	  helper functions.  Connector helpers need to provide mode fetch and
+	  validity functions as well as an encoder matching function for
+	  returing an ideal encoder for a given connector.  The core
+	  connector functions include a DPMS callback, (deprecated)
+	  save/restore routines, detection, mode probing, property handling,
+	  and cleanup functions.
+	</para>
+<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_crtc.h-->
+<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_crtc.c-->
+<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_crtc_helper.c-->
+      </sect3>
+    </sect2>
+  </sect1>
+
+  <!-- Internals: vblank handling -->
+
+  <sect1>
+    <title>VBlank event handling</title>
+    <para>
+      The DRM core exposes two vertical blank related ioctls:
+      DRM_IOCTL_WAIT_VBLANK and DRM_IOCTL_MODESET_CTL.
+<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_irq.c-->
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      DRM_IOCTL_WAIT_VBLANK takes a struct drm_wait_vblank structure
+      as its argument, and is used to block or request a signal when a
+      specified vblank event occurs.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      DRM_IOCTL_MODESET_CTL should be called by application level
+      drivers before and after mode setting, since on many devices the
+      vertical blank counter will be reset at that time.  Internally,
+      the DRM snapshots the last vblank count when the ioctl is called
+      with the _DRM_PRE_MODESET command so that the counter won't go
+      backwards (which is dealt with when _DRM_POST_MODESET is used).
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      To support the functions above, the DRM core provides several
+      helper functions for tracking vertical blank counters, and
+      requires drivers to provide several callbacks:
+      get_vblank_counter(), enable_vblank() and disable_vblank().  The
+      core uses get_vblank_counter() to keep the counter accurate
+      across interrupt disable periods.  It should return the current
+      vertical blank event count, which is often tracked in a device
+      register.  The enable and disable vblank callbacks should enable
+      and disable vertical blank interrupts, respectively.  In the
+      absence of DRM clients waiting on vblank events, the core DRM
+      code will use the disable_vblank() function to disable
+      interrupts, which saves power.  They'll be re-enabled again when
+      a client calls the vblank wait ioctl above.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      Devices that don't provide a count register can simply use an
+      internal atomic counter incremented on every vertical blank
+      interrupt, and can make their enable and disable vblank
+      functions into no-ops.
+    </para>
+  </sect1>
+
+  <sect1>
+    <title>Memory management</title>
+    <para>
+      The memory manager lies at the heart of many DRM operations, and
+      is also required to support advanced client features like OpenGL
+      pbuffers.  The DRM currently contains two memory managers, TTM
+      and GEM.
+    </para>
+
+    <sect2>
+      <title>The Translation Table Manager (TTM)</title>
+      <para>
+	TTM was developed by Tungsten Graphics, primarily by Thomas
+	Hellström, and is intended to be a flexible, high performance
+	graphics memory manager.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	Drivers wishing to support TTM must fill out a drm_bo_driver
+	structure.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	TTM design background and information belongs here.
+      </para>
+    </sect2>
+
+    <sect2>
+      <title>The Graphics Execution Manager (GEM)</title>
+      <para>
+	GEM is an Intel project, authored by Eric Anholt and Keith
+	Packard.  It provides simpler interfaces than TTM, and is well
+	suited for UMA devices.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	GEM-enabled drivers must provide gem_init_object() and
+	gem_free_object() callbacks to support the core memory
+	allocation routines.  They should also provide several driver
+	specific ioctls to support command execution, pinning, buffer
+	read &amp; write, mapping, and domain ownership transfers.
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	On a fundamental level, GEM involves several operations: memory
+	allocation and freeing, command execution, and aperture management
+	at command execution time.  Buffer object allocation is relatively
+	straightforward and largely provided by Linux's shmem layer, which
+	provides memory to back each object.  When mapped into the GTT
+	or used in a command buffer, the backing pages for an object are
+	flushed to memory and marked write combined so as to be coherent
+	with the GPU.  Likewise, when the GPU finishes rendering to an object,
+	if the CPU accesses it, it must be made coherent with the CPU's view
+	of memory, usually involving GPU cache flushing of various kinds.
+	This core CPU&lt;-&gt;GPU coherency management is provided by the GEM
+	set domain function, which evaluates an object's current domain and
+	performs any necessary flushing or synchronization to put the object
+	into the desired coherency domain (note that the object may be busy,
+	i.e. an active render target; in that case the set domain function
+	will block the client and wait for rendering to complete before
+	performing any necessary flushing operations).
+      </para>
+      <para>
+	Perhaps the most important GEM function is providing a command
+	execution interface to clients.  Client programs construct command
+	buffers containing references to previously allocated memory objects
+	and submit them to GEM.  At that point, GEM will take care to bind
+	all the objects into the GTT, execute the buffer, and provide
+	necessary synchronization between clients accessing the same buffers.
+	This often involves evicting some objects from the GTT and re-binding
+	others (a fairly expensive operation), and providing relocation
+	support which hides fixed GTT offsets from clients.  Clients must
+	take care not to submit command buffers that reference more objects
+	than can fit in the GTT or GEM will reject them and no rendering
+	will occur.  Similarly, if several objects in the buffer require
+	fence registers to be allocated for correct rendering (e.g. 2D blits
+	on pre-965 chips), care must be taken not to require more fence
+	registers than are available to the client.  Such resource management
+	should be abstracted from the client in libdrm.
+      </para>
+    </sect2>
+
+  </sect1>
+
+  <!-- Output management -->
+  <sect1>
+    <title>Output management</title>
+    <para>
+      At the core of the DRM output management code is a set of
+      structures representing CRTCs, encoders and connectors.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      A CRTC is an abstraction representing a part of the chip that
+      contains a pointer to a scanout buffer.  Therefore, the number
+      of CRTCs available determines how many independent scanout
+      buffers can be active at any given time.  The CRTC structure
+      contains several fields to support this: a pointer to some video
+      memory, a display mode, and an (x, y) offset into the video
+      memory to support panning or configurations where one piece of
+      video memory spans multiple CRTCs.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      An encoder takes pixel data from a CRTC and converts it to a
+      format suitable for any attached connectors.  On some devices,
+      it may be possible to have a CRTC send data to more than one
+      encoder.  In that case, both encoders would receive data from
+      the same scanout buffer, resulting in a "cloned" display
+      configuration across the connectors attached to each encoder.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      A connector is the final destination for pixel data on a device,
+      and usually connects directly to an external display device like
+      a monitor or laptop panel.  A connector can only be attached to
+      one encoder at a time.  The connector is also the structure
+      where information about the attached display is kept, so it
+      contains fields for display data, EDID data, DPMS &amp;
+      connection status, and information about modes supported on the
+      attached displays.
+    </para>
+<!--!Edrivers/char/drm/drm_crtc.c-->
+  </sect1>
+
+  <sect1>
+    <title>Framebuffer management</title>
+    <para>
+      In order to set a mode on a given CRTC, encoder and connector
+      configuration, clients need to provide a framebuffer object which
+      will provide a source of pixels for the CRTC to deliver to the encoder(s)
+      and ultimately the connector(s) in the configuration.  A framebuffer
+      is fundamentally a driver specific memory object, made into an opaque
+      handle by the DRM addfb function.  Once an fb has been created this
+      way it can be passed to the KMS mode setting routines for use in
+      a configuration.
+    </para>
+  </sect1>
+
+  <sect1>
+    <title>Command submission &amp; fencing</title>
+    <para>
+      This should cover a few device specific command submission
+      implementations.
+    </para>
+  </sect1>
+
+  <sect1>
+    <title>Suspend/resume</title>
+    <para>
+      The DRM core provides some suspend/resume code, but drivers
+      wanting full suspend/resume support should provide save() and
+      restore() functions.  These will be called at suspend,
+      hibernate, or resume time, and should perform any state save or
+      restore required by your device across suspend or hibernate
+      states.
+    </para>
+  </sect1>
+
+  <sect1>
+    <title>DMA services</title>
+    <para>
+      This should cover how DMA mapping etc. is supported by the core.
+      These functions are deprecated and should not be used.
+    </para>
+  </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <!-- External interfaces -->
+
+  <chapter id="drmExternals">
+    <title>Userland interfaces</title>
+    <para>
+      The DRM core exports several interfaces to applications,
+      generally intended to be used through corresponding libdrm
+      wrapper functions.  In addition, drivers export device specific
+      interfaces for use by userspace drivers &amp; device aware
+      applications through ioctls and sysfs files.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      External interfaces include: memory mapping, context management,
+      DMA operations, AGP management, vblank control, fence
+      management, memory management, and output management.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+      Cover generic ioctls and sysfs layout here.  Only need high
+      level info, since man pages will cover the rest.
+    </para>
+  </chapter>
+
+  <!-- API reference -->
+
+  <appendix id="drmDriverApi">
+    <title>DRM Driver API</title>
+    <para>
+      Include auto-generated API reference here (need to reference it
+      from paragraphs above too).
+    </para>
+  </appendix>
+
+</book>

+ 516 - 176
Documentation/DocBook/kgdb.tmpl

@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
 
 
 <book id="kgdbOnLinux">
 <book id="kgdbOnLinux">
  <bookinfo>
  <bookinfo>
-  <title>Using kgdb and the kgdb Internals</title>
+  <title>Using kgdb, kdb and the kernel debugger internals</title>
 
 
   <authorgroup>
   <authorgroup>
    <author>
    <author>
@@ -17,33 +17,8 @@
     </affiliation>
     </affiliation>
    </author>
    </author>
   </authorgroup>
   </authorgroup>
-
-  <authorgroup>
-   <author>
-    <firstname>Tom</firstname>
-    <surname>Rini</surname>
-    <affiliation>
-     <address>
-      <email>trini@kernel.crashing.org</email>
-     </address>
-    </affiliation>
-   </author>
-  </authorgroup>
-
-  <authorgroup>
-   <author>
-    <firstname>Amit S.</firstname>
-    <surname>Kale</surname>
-    <affiliation>
-     <address>
-      <email>amitkale@linsyssoft.com</email>
-     </address>
-    </affiliation>
-   </author>
-  </authorgroup>
-
   <copyright>
   <copyright>
-   <year>2008</year>
+   <year>2008,2010</year>
    <holder>Wind River Systems, Inc.</holder>
    <holder>Wind River Systems, Inc.</holder>
   </copyright>
   </copyright>
   <copyright>
   <copyright>
@@ -69,41 +44,76 @@
   <chapter id="Introduction">
   <chapter id="Introduction">
     <title>Introduction</title>
     <title>Introduction</title>
     <para>
     <para>
-    kgdb is a source level debugger for linux kernel. It is used along
-    with gdb to debug a linux kernel.  The expectation is that gdb can
-    be used to "break in" to the kernel to inspect memory, variables
-    and look through call stack information similar to what an
-    application developer would use gdb for.  It is possible to place
-    breakpoints in kernel code and perform some limited execution
-    stepping.
+    The kernel has two different debugger front ends (kdb and kgdb)
+    which interface to the debug core.  It is possible to use either
+    of the debugger front ends and dynamically transition between them
+    if you configure the kernel properly at compile and runtime.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+    Kdb is simplistic shell-style interface which you can use on a
+    system console with a keyboard or serial console.  You can use it
+    to inspect memory, registers, process lists, dmesg, and even set
+    breakpoints to stop in a certain location.  Kdb is not a source
+    level debugger, although you can set breakpoints and execute some
+    basic kernel run control.  Kdb is mainly aimed at doing some
+    analysis to aid in development or diagnosing kernel problems.  You
+    can access some symbols by name in kernel built-ins or in kernel
+    modules if the code was built
+    with <symbol>CONFIG_KALLSYMS</symbol>.
+    </para>
+    <para>
+    Kgdb is intended to be used as a source level debugger for the
+    Linux kernel. It is used along with gdb to debug a Linux kernel.
+    The expectation is that gdb can be used to "break in" to the
+    kernel to inspect memory, variables and look through call stack
+    information similar to the way an application developer would use
+    gdb to debug an application.  It is possible to place breakpoints
+    in kernel code and perform some limited execution stepping.
     </para>
     </para>
     <para>
     <para>
-    Two machines are required for using kgdb. One of these machines is a
-    development machine and the other is a test machine.  The kernel
-    to be debugged runs on the test machine. The development machine
-    runs an instance of gdb against the vmlinux file which contains
-    the symbols (not boot image such as bzImage, zImage, uImage...).
-    In gdb the developer specifies the connection parameters and
-    connects to kgdb.  The type of connection a developer makes with
-    gdb depends on the availability of kgdb I/O modules compiled as
-    builtin's or kernel modules in the test machine's kernel.
+    Two machines are required for using kgdb. One of these machines is
+    a development machine and the other is the target machine.  The
+    kernel to be debugged runs on the target machine. The development
+    machine runs an instance of gdb against the vmlinux file which
+    contains the symbols (not boot image such as bzImage, zImage,
+    uImage...).  In gdb the developer specifies the connection
+    parameters and connects to kgdb.  The type of connection a
+    developer makes with gdb depends on the availability of kgdb I/O
+    modules compiled as built-ins or loadable kernel modules in the test
+    machine's kernel.
     </para>
     </para>
   </chapter>
   </chapter>
   <chapter id="CompilingAKernel">
   <chapter id="CompilingAKernel">
-    <title>Compiling a kernel</title>
+  <title>Compiling a kernel</title>
+  <para>
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem><para>In order to enable compilation of kdb, you must first enable kgdb.</para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>The kgdb test compile options are described in the kgdb test suite chapter.</para></listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+  </para>
+  <sect1 id="CompileKGDB">
+    <title>Kernel config options for kgdb</title>
     <para>
     <para>
     To enable <symbol>CONFIG_KGDB</symbol> you should first turn on
     To enable <symbol>CONFIG_KGDB</symbol> you should first turn on
     "Prompt for development and/or incomplete code/drivers"
     "Prompt for development and/or incomplete code/drivers"
     (CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL) in  "General setup", then under the
     (CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL) in  "General setup", then under the
-    "Kernel debugging" select "KGDB: kernel debugging with remote gdb".
+    "Kernel debugging" select "KGDB: kernel debugger".
+    </para>
+    <para>
+    While it is not a hard requirement that you have symbols in your
+    vmlinux file, gdb tends not to be very useful without the symbolic
+    data, so you will want to turn
+    on <symbol>CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO</symbol> which is called "Compile the
+    kernel with debug info" in the config menu.
     </para>
     </para>
     <para>
     <para>
     It is advised, but not required that you turn on the
     It is advised, but not required that you turn on the
-    CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER kernel option.  This option inserts code to
-    into the compiled executable which saves the frame information in
-    registers or on the stack at different points which will allow a
-    debugger such as gdb to more accurately construct stack back traces
-    while debugging the kernel.
+    <symbol>CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER</symbol> kernel option which is called "Compile the
+    kernel with frame pointers" in the config menu.  This option
+    inserts code to into the compiled executable which saves the frame
+    information in registers or on the stack at different points which
+    allows a debugger such as gdb to more accurately construct
+    stack back traces while debugging the kernel.
     </para>
     </para>
     <para>
     <para>
     If the architecture that you are using supports the kernel option
     If the architecture that you are using supports the kernel option
@@ -116,38 +126,160 @@
     this option.
     this option.
     </para>
     </para>
     <para>
     <para>
-    Next you should choose one of more I/O drivers to interconnect debugging
-    host and debugged target.  Early boot debugging requires a KGDB
-    I/O driver that supports early debugging and the driver must be
-    built into the kernel directly. Kgdb I/O driver configuration
-    takes place via kernel or module parameters, see following
-    chapter.
+    Next you should choose one of more I/O drivers to interconnect
+    debugging host and debugged target.  Early boot debugging requires
+    a KGDB I/O driver that supports early debugging and the driver
+    must be built into the kernel directly. Kgdb I/O driver
+    configuration takes place via kernel or module parameters which
+    you can learn more about in the in the section that describes the
+    parameter "kgdboc".
     </para>
     </para>
-    <para>
-    The kgdb test compile options are described in the kgdb test suite chapter.
+    <para>Here is an example set of .config symbols to enable or
+    disable for kgdb:
+    <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem><para># CONFIG_DEBUG_RODATA is not set</para></listitem>
+    <listitem><para>CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER=y</para></listitem>
+    <listitem><para>CONFIG_KGDB=y</para></listitem>
+    <listitem><para>CONFIG_KGDB_SERIAL_CONSOLE=y</para></listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
     </para>
     </para>
-
+  </sect1>
+  <sect1 id="CompileKDB">
+    <title>Kernel config options for kdb</title>
+    <para>Kdb is quite a bit more complex than the simple gdbstub
+    sitting on top of the kernel's debug core.  Kdb must implement a
+    shell, and also adds some helper functions in other parts of the
+    kernel, responsible for printing out interesting data such as what
+    you would see if you ran "lsmod", or "ps".  In order to build kdb
+    into the kernel you follow the same steps as you would for kgdb.
+    </para>
+    <para>The main config option for kdb
+    is <symbol>CONFIG_KGDB_KDB</symbol> which is called "KGDB_KDB:
+    include kdb frontend for kgdb" in the config menu.  In theory you
+    would have already also selected an I/O driver such as the
+    CONFIG_KGDB_SERIAL_CONSOLE interface if you plan on using kdb on a
+    serial port, when you were configuring kgdb.
+    </para>
+    <para>If you want to use a PS/2-style keyboard with kdb, you would
+    select CONFIG_KDB_KEYBOARD which is called "KGDB_KDB: keyboard as
+    input device" in the config menu.  The CONFIG_KDB_KEYBOARD option
+    is not used for anything in the gdb interface to kgdb.  The
+    CONFIG_KDB_KEYBOARD option only works with kdb.
+    </para>
+    <para>Here is an example set of .config symbols to enable/disable kdb:
+    <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem><para># CONFIG_DEBUG_RODATA is not set</para></listitem>
+    <listitem><para>CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER=y</para></listitem>
+    <listitem><para>CONFIG_KGDB=y</para></listitem>
+    <listitem><para>CONFIG_KGDB_SERIAL_CONSOLE=y</para></listitem>
+    <listitem><para>CONFIG_KGDB_KDB=y</para></listitem>
+    <listitem><para>CONFIG_KDB_KEYBOARD=y</para></listitem>
+    </itemizedlist>
+    </para>
+  </sect1>
   </chapter>
   </chapter>
-  <chapter id="EnableKGDB">
-   <title>Enable kgdb for debugging</title>
-   <para>
-   In order to use kgdb you must activate it by passing configuration
-   information to one of the kgdb I/O drivers.  If you do not pass any
-   configuration information kgdb will not do anything at all.  Kgdb
-   will only actively hook up to the kernel trap hooks if a kgdb I/O
-   driver is loaded and configured.  If you unconfigure a kgdb I/O
-   driver, kgdb will unregister all the kernel hook points.
+  <chapter id="kgdbKernelArgs">
+  <title>Kernel Debugger Boot Arguments</title>
+  <para>This section describes the various runtime kernel
+  parameters that affect the configuration of the kernel debugger.
+  The following chapter covers using kdb and kgdb as well as
+  provides some examples of the configuration parameters.</para>
+   <sect1 id="kgdboc">
+   <title>Kernel parameter: kgdboc</title>
+   <para>The kgdboc driver was originally an abbreviation meant to
+   stand for "kgdb over console".  Today it is the primary mechanism
+   to configure how to communicate from gdb to kgdb as well as the
+   devices you want to use to interact with the kdb shell.
+   </para>
+   <para>For kgdb/gdb, kgdboc is designed to work with a single serial
+   port. It is intended to cover the circumstance where you want to
+   use a serial console as your primary console as well as using it to
+   perform kernel debugging.  It is also possible to use kgdb on a
+   serial port which is not designated as a system console.  Kgdboc
+   may be configured as a kernel built-in or a kernel loadable module.
+   You can only make use of <constant>kgdbwait</constant> and early
+   debugging if you build kgdboc into the kernel as a built-in.
    </para>
    </para>
+   <sect2 id="kgdbocArgs">
+   <title>kgdboc arguments</title>
+   <para>Usage: <constant>kgdboc=[kbd][[,]serial_device][,baud]</constant></para>
+   <sect3 id="kgdbocArgs1">
+   <title>Using loadable module or built-in</title>
    <para>
    <para>
-   All drivers can be reconfigured at run time, if
-   <symbol>CONFIG_SYSFS</symbol> and <symbol>CONFIG_MODULES</symbol>
-   are enabled, by echo'ing a new config string to
-   <constant>/sys/module/&lt;driver&gt;/parameter/&lt;option&gt;</constant>.
-   The driver can be unconfigured by passing an empty string.  You cannot
-   change the configuration while the debugger is attached.  Make sure
-   to detach the debugger with the <constant>detach</constant> command
-   prior to trying unconfigure a kgdb I/O driver.
+   <orderedlist>
+   <listitem><para>As a kernel built-in:</para>
+   <para>Use the kernel boot argument: <constant>kgdboc=&lt;tty-device&gt;,[baud]</constant></para></listitem>
+   <listitem>
+   <para>As a kernel loadable module:</para>
+   <para>Use the command: <constant>modprobe kgdboc kgdboc=&lt;tty-device&gt;,[baud]</constant></para>
+   <para>Here are two examples of how you might formate the kgdboc
+   string. The first is for an x86 target using the first serial port.
+   The second example is for the ARM Versatile AB using the second
+   serial port.
+   <orderedlist>
+   <listitem><para><constant>kgdboc=ttyS0,115200</constant></para></listitem>
+   <listitem><para><constant>kgdboc=ttyAMA1,115200</constant></para></listitem>
+   </orderedlist>
    </para>
    </para>
+   </listitem>
+   </orderedlist></para>
+   </sect3>
+   <sect3 id="kgdbocArgs2">
+   <title>Configure kgdboc at runtime with sysfs</title>
+   <para>At run time you can enable or disable kgdboc by echoing a
+   parameters into the sysfs.  Here are two examples:</para>
+   <orderedlist>
+   <listitem><para>Enable kgdboc on ttyS0</para>
+   <para><constant>echo ttyS0 &gt; /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc</constant></para></listitem>
+   <listitem><para>Disable kgdboc</para>
+   <para><constant>echo "" &gt; /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc</constant></para></listitem>
+   </orderedlist>
+   <para>NOTE: You do not need to specify the baud if you are
+   configuring the console on tty which is already configured or
+   open.</para>
+   </sect3>
+   <sect3 id="kgdbocArgs3">
+   <title>More examples</title>
+   <para>You can configure kgdboc to use the keyboard, and or a serial device
+   depending on if you are using kdb and or kgdb, in one of the
+   following scenarios.
+   <orderedlist>
+   <listitem><para>kdb and kgdb over only a serial port</para>
+   <para><constant>kgdboc=&lt;serial_device&gt;[,baud]</constant></para>
+   <para>Example: <constant>kgdboc=ttyS0,115200</constant></para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem><para>kdb and kgdb with keyboard and a serial port</para>
+   <para><constant>kgdboc=kbd,&lt;serial_device&gt;[,baud]</constant></para>
+   <para>Example: <constant>kgdboc=kbd,ttyS0,115200</constant></para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem><para>kdb with a keyboard</para>
+   <para><constant>kgdboc=kbd</constant></para>
+   </listitem>
+   </orderedlist>
+   </para>
+   </sect3>
+   <para>NOTE: Kgdboc does not support interrupting the target via the
+   gdb remote protocol.  You must manually send a sysrq-g unless you
+   have a proxy that splits console output to a terminal program.
+   A console proxy has a separate TCP port for the debugger and a separate
+   TCP port for the "human" console.  The proxy can take care of sending
+   the sysrq-g for you.
+   </para>
+   <para>When using kgdboc with no debugger proxy, you can end up
+    connecting the debugger at one of two entry points.  If an
+    exception occurs after you have loaded kgdboc, a message should
+    print on the console stating it is waiting for the debugger.  In
+    this case you disconnect your terminal program and then connect the
+    debugger in its place.  If you want to interrupt the target system
+    and forcibly enter a debug session you have to issue a Sysrq
+    sequence and then type the letter <constant>g</constant>.  Then
+    you disconnect the terminal session and connect gdb.  Your options
+    if you don't like this are to hack gdb to send the sysrq-g for you
+    as well as on the initial connect, or to use a debugger proxy that
+    allows an unmodified gdb to do the debugging.
+   </para>
+   </sect2>
+   </sect1>
    <sect1 id="kgdbwait">
    <sect1 id="kgdbwait">
    <title>Kernel parameter: kgdbwait</title>
    <title>Kernel parameter: kgdbwait</title>
    <para>
    <para>
@@ -162,103 +294,204 @@
    </para>
    </para>
    <para>
    <para>
    The kernel will stop and wait as early as the I/O driver and
    The kernel will stop and wait as early as the I/O driver and
-   architecture will allow when you use this option.  If you build the
-   kgdb I/O driver as a kernel module kgdbwait will not do anything.
+   architecture allows when you use this option.  If you build the
+   kgdb I/O driver as a loadable kernel module kgdbwait will not do
+   anything.
    </para>
    </para>
    </sect1>
    </sect1>
-  <sect1 id="kgdboc">
-  <title>Kernel parameter: kgdboc</title>
-  <para>
-  The kgdboc driver was originally an abbreviation meant to stand for
-  "kgdb over console".  Kgdboc is designed to work with a single
-  serial port. It was meant to cover the circumstance
-  where you wanted to use a serial console as your primary console as
-  well as using it to perform kernel debugging.  Of course you can
-  also use kgdboc without assigning a console to the same port.
+   <sect1 id="kgdbcon">
+   <title>Kernel parameter: kgdbcon</title>
+   <para> The kgdbcon feature allows you to see printk() messages
+   inside gdb while gdb is connected to the kernel.  Kdb does not make
+    use of the kgdbcon feature.
+   </para>
+   <para>Kgdb supports using the gdb serial protocol to send console
+   messages to the debugger when the debugger is connected and running.
+   There are two ways to activate this feature.
+   <orderedlist>
+   <listitem><para>Activate with the kernel command line option:</para>
+   <para><constant>kgdbcon</constant></para>
+   </listitem>
+   <listitem><para>Use sysfs before configuring an I/O driver</para>
+   <para>
+   <constant>echo 1 &gt; /sys/module/kgdb/parameters/kgdb_use_con</constant>
+   </para>
+   <para>
+   NOTE: If you do this after you configure the kgdb I/O driver, the
+   setting will not take effect until the next point the I/O is
+   reconfigured.
+   </para>
+   </listitem>
+   </orderedlist>
+   <para>IMPORTANT NOTE: You cannot use kgdboc + kgdbcon on a tty that is an
+   active system console.  An example incorrect usage is <constant>console=ttyS0,115200 kgdboc=ttyS0 kgdbcon</constant>
+   </para>
+   <para>It is possible to use this option with kgdboc on a tty that is not a system console.
+   </para>
   </para>
   </para>
-  <sect2 id="UsingKgdboc">
-  <title>Using kgdboc</title>
-  <para>
-  You can configure kgdboc via sysfs or a module or kernel boot line
-  parameter depending on if you build with CONFIG_KGDBOC as a module
-  or built-in.
-  <orderedlist>
-  <listitem><para>From the module load or build-in</para>
-  <para><constant>kgdboc=&lt;tty-device&gt;,[baud]</constant></para>
+  </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="usingKDB">
+  <title>Using kdb</title>
   <para>
   <para>
-  The example here would be if your console port was typically ttyS0, you would use something like <constant>kgdboc=ttyS0,115200</constant> or on the ARM Versatile AB you would likely use <constant>kgdboc=ttyAMA0,115200</constant>
+  </para>
+  <sect1 id="quickKDBserial">
+  <title>Quick start for kdb on a serial port</title>
+  <para>This is a quick example of how to use kdb.</para>
+  <para><orderedlist>
+  <listitem><para>Boot kernel with arguments:
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem><para><constant>console=ttyS0,115200 kgdboc=ttyS0,115200</constant></para></listitem>
+  </itemizedlist></para>
+  <para>OR</para>
+  <para>Configure kgdboc after the kernel booted; assuming you are using a serial port console:
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem><para><constant>echo ttyS0 &gt; /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc</constant></para></listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
   </para>
   </para>
   </listitem>
   </listitem>
-  <listitem><para>From sysfs</para>
-  <para><constant>echo ttyS0 &gt; /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc</constant></para>
+  <listitem><para>Enter the kernel debugger manually or by waiting for an oops or fault.  There are several ways you can enter the kernel debugger manually; all involve using the sysrq-g, which means you must have enabled CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ=y in your kernel config.</para>
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem><para>When logged in as root or with a super user session you can run:</para>
+   <para><constant>echo g &gt; /proc/sysrq-trigger</constant></para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>Example using minicom 2.2</para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>Control-a</constant></para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>f</constant></para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>g</constant></para>
   </listitem>
   </listitem>
-  </orderedlist>
-  </para>
-  <para>
-  NOTE: Kgdboc does not support interrupting the target via the
-  gdb remote protocol.  You must manually send a sysrq-g unless you
-  have a proxy that splits console output to a terminal problem and
-  has a separate port for the debugger to connect to that sends the
-  sysrq-g for you.
+  <listitem><para>When you have telneted to a terminal server that supports sending a remote break</para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>Control-]</constant></para>
+  <para>Type in:<constant>send break</constant></para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>Enter</constant></para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>g</constant></para>
+  </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+  </listitem>
+  <listitem><para>From the kdb prompt you can run the "help" command to see a complete list of the commands that are available.</para>
+  <para>Some useful commands in kdb include:
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem><para>lsmod  -- Shows where kernel modules are loaded</para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>ps -- Displays only the active processes</para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>ps A -- Shows all the processes</para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>summary -- Shows kernel version info and memory usage</para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>bt -- Get a backtrace of the current process using dump_stack()</para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>dmesg -- View the kernel syslog buffer</para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>go -- Continue the system</para></listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
   </para>
   </para>
-  <para>When using kgdboc with no debugger proxy, you can end up
-  connecting the debugger for one of two entry points.  If an
-  exception occurs after you have loaded kgdboc a message should print
-  on the console stating it is waiting for the debugger.  In case you
-  disconnect your terminal program and then connect the debugger in
-  its place.  If you want to interrupt the target system and forcibly
-  enter a debug session you have to issue a Sysrq sequence and then
-  type the letter <constant>g</constant>.  Then you disconnect the
-  terminal session and connect gdb.  Your options if you don't like
-  this are to hack gdb to send the sysrq-g for you as well as on the
-  initial connect, or to use a debugger proxy that allows an
-  unmodified gdb to do the debugging.
+  </listitem>
+  <listitem>
+  <para>When you are done using kdb you need to consider rebooting the
+  system or using the "go" command to resuming normal kernel
+  execution.  If you have paused the kernel for a lengthy period of
+  time, applications that rely on timely networking or anything to do
+  with real wall clock time could be adversely affected, so you
+  should take this into consideration when using the kernel
+  debugger.</para>
+  </listitem>
+  </orderedlist></para>
+  </sect1>
+  <sect1 id="quickKDBkeyboard">
+  <title>Quick start for kdb using a keyboard connected console</title>
+  <para>This is a quick example of how to use kdb with a keyboard.</para>
+  <para><orderedlist>
+  <listitem><para>Boot kernel with arguments:
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem><para><constant>kgdboc=kbd</constant></para></listitem>
+  </itemizedlist></para>
+  <para>OR</para>
+  <para>Configure kgdboc after the kernel booted:
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem><para><constant>echo kbd &gt; /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc</constant></para></listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
   </para>
   </para>
-  </sect2>
+  </listitem>
+  <listitem><para>Enter the kernel debugger manually or by waiting for an oops or fault.  There are several ways you can enter the kernel debugger manually; all involve using the sysrq-g, which means you must have enabled CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ=y in your kernel config.</para>
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem><para>When logged in as root or with a super user session you can run:</para>
+   <para><constant>echo g &gt; /proc/sysrq-trigger</constant></para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>Example using a laptop keyboard</para>
+  <para>Press and hold down: <constant>Alt</constant></para>
+  <para>Press and hold down: <constant>Fn</constant></para>
+  <para>Press and release the key with the label: <constant>SysRq</constant></para>
+  <para>Release: <constant>Fn</constant></para>
+  <para>Press and release: <constant>g</constant></para>
+  <para>Release: <constant>Alt</constant></para>
+  </listitem>
+  <listitem><para>Example using a PS/2 101-key keyboard</para>
+  <para>Press and hold down: <constant>Alt</constant></para>
+  <para>Press and release the key with the label: <constant>SysRq</constant></para>
+  <para>Press and release: <constant>g</constant></para>
+  <para>Release: <constant>Alt</constant></para>
+  </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
+  </listitem>
+  <listitem>
+  <para>Now type in a kdb command such as "help", "dmesg", "bt" or "go" to continue kernel execution.</para>
+  </listitem>
+  </orderedlist></para>
   </sect1>
   </sect1>
-  <sect1 id="kgdbcon">
-  <title>Kernel parameter: kgdbcon</title>
-  <para>
-  Kgdb supports using the gdb serial protocol to send console messages
-  to the debugger when the debugger is connected and running.  There
-  are two ways to activate this feature.
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="EnableKGDB">
+   <title>Using kgdb / gdb</title>
+   <para>In order to use kgdb you must activate it by passing
+   configuration information to one of the kgdb I/O drivers.  If you
+   do not pass any configuration information kgdb will not do anything
+   at all.  Kgdb will only actively hook up to the kernel trap hooks
+   if a kgdb I/O driver is loaded and configured.  If you unconfigure
+   a kgdb I/O driver, kgdb will unregister all the kernel hook points.
+   </para>
+   <para> All kgdb I/O drivers can be reconfigured at run time, if
+   <symbol>CONFIG_SYSFS</symbol> and <symbol>CONFIG_MODULES</symbol>
+   are enabled, by echo'ing a new config string to
+   <constant>/sys/module/&lt;driver&gt;/parameter/&lt;option&gt;</constant>.
+   The driver can be unconfigured by passing an empty string.  You cannot
+   change the configuration while the debugger is attached.  Make sure
+   to detach the debugger with the <constant>detach</constant> command
+   prior to trying to unconfigure a kgdb I/O driver.
+   </para>
+  <sect1 id="ConnectingGDB">
+  <title>Connecting with gdb to a serial port</title>
   <orderedlist>
   <orderedlist>
-  <listitem><para>Activate with the kernel command line option:</para>
-  <para><constant>kgdbcon</constant></para>
+  <listitem><para>Configure kgdboc</para>
+   <para>Boot kernel with arguments:
+   <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem><para><constant>kgdboc=ttyS0,115200</constant></para></listitem>
+   </itemizedlist></para>
+   <para>OR</para>
+   <para>Configure kgdboc after the kernel booted:
+   <itemizedlist>
+    <listitem><para><constant>echo ttyS0 &gt; /sys/module/kgdboc/parameters/kgdboc</constant></para></listitem>
+   </itemizedlist></para>
   </listitem>
   </listitem>
-  <listitem><para>Use sysfs before configuring an io driver</para>
-  <para>
-  <constant>echo 1 &gt; /sys/module/kgdb/parameters/kgdb_use_con</constant>
-  </para>
-  <para>
-  NOTE: If you do this after you configure the kgdb I/O driver, the
-  setting will not take effect until the next point the I/O is
-  reconfigured.
-  </para>
+  <listitem>
+  <para>Stop kernel execution (break into the debugger)</para>
+  <para>In order to connect to gdb via kgdboc, the kernel must
+  first be stopped.  There are several ways to stop the kernel which
+  include using kgdbwait as a boot argument, via a sysrq-g, or running
+  the kernel until it takes an exception where it waits for the
+  debugger to attach.
+  <itemizedlist>
+  <listitem><para>When logged in as root or with a super user session you can run:</para>
+   <para><constant>echo g &gt; /proc/sysrq-trigger</constant></para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>Example using minicom 2.2</para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>Control-a</constant></para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>f</constant></para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>g</constant></para>
   </listitem>
   </listitem>
-  </orderedlist>
-  </para>
-  <para>
-  IMPORTANT NOTE: Using this option with kgdb over the console
-  (kgdboc) is not supported.
+  <listitem><para>When you have telneted to a terminal server that supports sending a remote break</para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>Control-]</constant></para>
+  <para>Type in:<constant>send break</constant></para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>Enter</constant></para>
+  <para>Press: <constant>g</constant></para>
+  </listitem>
+  </itemizedlist>
   </para>
   </para>
-  </sect1>
-  </chapter>
-  <chapter id="ConnectingGDB">
-  <title>Connecting gdb</title>
-    <para>
-    If you are using kgdboc, you need to have used kgdbwait as a boot
-    argument, issued a sysrq-g, or the system you are going to debug
-    has already taken an exception and is waiting for the debugger to
-    attach before you can connect gdb.
-    </para>
-    <para>
-    If you are not using different kgdb I/O driver other than kgdboc,
-    you should be able to connect and the target will automatically
-    respond.
-    </para>
+  </listitem>
+  <listitem>
+    <para>Connect from from gdb</para>
     <para>
     <para>
-    Example (using a serial port):
+    Example (using a directly connected port):
     </para>
     </para>
     <programlisting>
     <programlisting>
     % gdb ./vmlinux
     % gdb ./vmlinux
@@ -266,7 +499,7 @@
     (gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS0
     (gdb) target remote /dev/ttyS0
     </programlisting>
     </programlisting>
     <para>
     <para>
-    Example (kgdb to a terminal server on tcp port 2012):
+    Example (kgdb to a terminal server on TCP port 2012):
     </para>
     </para>
     <programlisting>
     <programlisting>
     % gdb ./vmlinux
     % gdb ./vmlinux
@@ -283,6 +516,83 @@
     communications.  You do this prior to issuing the <constant>target
     communications.  You do this prior to issuing the <constant>target
     remote</constant> command by typing in: <constant>set debug remote 1</constant>
     remote</constant> command by typing in: <constant>set debug remote 1</constant>
     </para>
     </para>
+  </listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+  <para>Remember if you continue in gdb, and need to "break in" again,
+  you need to issue an other sysrq-g.  It is easy to create a simple
+  entry point by putting a breakpoint at <constant>sys_sync</constant>
+  and then you can run "sync" from a shell or script to break into the
+  debugger.</para>
+  </sect1>
+  </chapter>
+  <chapter id="switchKdbKgdb">
+  <title>kgdb and kdb interoperability</title>
+  <para>It is possible to transition between kdb and kgdb dynamically.
+  The debug core will remember which you used the last time and
+  automatically start in the same mode.</para>
+  <sect1>
+  <title>Switching between kdb and kgdb</title>
+  <sect2>
+  <title>Switching from kgdb to kdb</title>
+  <para>
+  There are two ways to switch from kgdb to kdb: you can use gdb to
+  issue a maintenance packet, or you can blindly type the command $3#33.
+  Whenever kernel debugger stops in kgdb mode it will print the
+  message <constant>KGDB or $3#33 for KDB</constant>.  It is important
+  to note that you have to type the sequence correctly in one pass.
+  You cannot type a backspace or delete because kgdb will interpret
+  that as part of the debug stream.
+  <orderedlist>
+  <listitem><para>Change from kgdb to kdb by blindly typing:</para>
+  <para><constant>$3#33</constant></para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>Change from kgdb to kdb with gdb</para>
+  <para><constant>maintenance packet 3</constant></para>
+  <para>NOTE: Now you must kill gdb. Typically you press control-z and
+  issue the command: kill -9 %</para></listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+  </para>
+  </sect2>
+  <sect2>
+  <title>Change from kdb to kgdb</title>
+  <para>There are two ways you can change from kdb to kgdb.  You can
+  manually enter kgdb mode by issuing the kgdb command from the kdb
+  shell prompt, or you can connect gdb while the kdb shell prompt is
+  active.  The kdb shell looks for the typical first commands that gdb
+  would issue with the gdb remote protocol and if it sees one of those
+  commands it automatically changes into kgdb mode.</para>
+  <orderedlist>
+  <listitem><para>From kdb issue the command:</para>
+  <para><constant>kgdb</constant></para>
+  <para>Now disconnect your terminal program and connect gdb in its place</para></listitem>
+  <listitem><para>At the kdb prompt, disconnect the terminal program and connect gdb in its place.</para></listitem>
+  </orderedlist>
+  </sect2>
+  </sect1>
+  <sect1>
+  <title>Running kdb commands from gdb</title>
+  <para>It is possible to run a limited set of kdb commands from gdb,
+  using the gdb monitor command.  You don't want to execute any of the
+  run control or breakpoint operations, because it can disrupt the
+  state of the kernel debugger.  You should be using gdb for
+  breakpoints and run control operations if you have gdb connected.
+  The more useful commands to run are things like lsmod, dmesg, ps or
+  possibly some of the memory information commands.  To see all the kdb
+  commands you can run <constant>monitor help</constant>.</para>
+  <para>Example:
+  <informalexample><programlisting>
+(gdb) monitor ps
+1 idle process (state I) and
+27 sleeping system daemon (state M) processes suppressed,
+use 'ps A' to see all.
+Task Addr       Pid   Parent [*] cpu State Thread     Command
+
+0xc78291d0        1        0  0    0   S  0xc7829404  init
+0xc7954150      942        1  0    0   S  0xc7954384  dropbear
+0xc78789c0      944        1  0    0   S  0xc7878bf4  sh
+(gdb)
+  </programlisting></informalexample>
+  </para>
+  </sect1>
   </chapter>
   </chapter>
   <chapter id="KGDBTestSuite">
   <chapter id="KGDBTestSuite">
     <title>kgdb Test Suite</title>
     <title>kgdb Test Suite</title>
@@ -309,34 +619,36 @@
     </para>
     </para>
   </chapter>
   </chapter>
   <chapter id="CommonBackEndReq">
   <chapter id="CommonBackEndReq">
-  <title>KGDB Internals</title>
+  <title>Kernel Debugger Internals</title>
   <sect1 id="kgdbArchitecture">
   <sect1 id="kgdbArchitecture">
     <title>Architecture Specifics</title>
     <title>Architecture Specifics</title>
       <para>
       <para>
-      Kgdb is organized into three basic components:
+      The kernel debugger is organized into a number of components:
       <orderedlist>
       <orderedlist>
-      <listitem><para>kgdb core</para>
+      <listitem><para>The debug core</para>
       <para>
       <para>
-      The kgdb core is found in kernel/kgdb.c.  It contains:
+      The debug core is found in kernel/debugger/debug_core.c.  It contains:
       <itemizedlist>
       <itemizedlist>
-      <listitem><para>All the logic to implement the gdb serial protocol</para></listitem>
-      <listitem><para>A generic OS exception handler which includes sync'ing the processors into a stopped state on an multi cpu system.</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>A generic OS exception handler which includes
+      sync'ing the processors into a stopped state on an multi-CPU
+      system.</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>The API to talk to the kgdb I/O drivers</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>The API to talk to the kgdb I/O drivers</para></listitem>
-      <listitem><para>The API to make calls to the arch specific kgdb implementation</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>The API to make calls to the arch-specific kgdb implementation</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>The logic to perform safe memory reads and writes to memory while using the debugger</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>The logic to perform safe memory reads and writes to memory while using the debugger</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>A full implementation for software breakpoints unless overridden by the arch</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>A full implementation for software breakpoints unless overridden by the arch</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>The API to invoke either the kdb or kgdb frontend to the debug core.</para></listitem>
       </itemizedlist>
       </itemizedlist>
       </para>
       </para>
       </listitem>
       </listitem>
-      <listitem><para>kgdb arch specific implementation</para>
+      <listitem><para>kgdb arch-specific implementation</para>
       <para>
       <para>
       This implementation is generally found in arch/*/kernel/kgdb.c.
       This implementation is generally found in arch/*/kernel/kgdb.c.
       As an example, arch/x86/kernel/kgdb.c contains the specifics to
       As an example, arch/x86/kernel/kgdb.c contains the specifics to
       implement HW breakpoint as well as the initialization to
       implement HW breakpoint as well as the initialization to
       dynamically register and unregister for the trap handlers on
       dynamically register and unregister for the trap handlers on
-      this architecture.  The arch specific portion implements:
+      this architecture.  The arch-specific portion implements:
       <itemizedlist>
       <itemizedlist>
-      <listitem><para>contains an arch specific trap catcher which
+      <listitem><para>contains an arch-specific trap catcher which
       invokes kgdb_handle_exception() to start kgdb about doing its
       invokes kgdb_handle_exception() to start kgdb about doing its
       work</para></listitem>
       work</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>translation to and from gdb specific packet format to pt_regs</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>translation to and from gdb specific packet format to pt_regs</para></listitem>
@@ -347,11 +659,35 @@
       </itemizedlist>
       </itemizedlist>
       </para>
       </para>
       </listitem>
       </listitem>
+      <listitem><para>gdbstub frontend (aka kgdb)</para>
+      <para>The gdbstub is located in kernel/debug/gdbstub.c. It contains:</para>
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem><para>All the logic to implement the gdb serial protocol</para></listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
+      <listitem><para>kdb frontend</para>
+      <para>The kdb debugger shell is broken down into a number of
+      components.  The kdb core is located in kernel/debug/kdb.  There
+      are a number of helper functions in some of the other kernel
+      components to make it possible for kdb to examine and report
+      information about the kernel without taking locks that could
+      cause a kernel deadlock.  The kdb core contains implements the following functionality.</para>
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem><para>A simple shell</para></listitem>
+        <listitem><para>The kdb core command set</para></listitem>
+        <listitem><para>A registration API to register additional kdb shell commands.</para>
+        <para>A good example of a self-contained kdb module is the "ftdump" command for dumping the ftrace buffer.  See: kernel/trace/trace_kdb.c</para></listitem>
+        <listitem><para>The implementation for kdb_printf() which
+        emits messages directly to I/O drivers, bypassing the kernel
+        log.</para></listitem>
+        <listitem><para>SW / HW breakpoint management for the kdb shell</para></listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+      </listitem>
       <listitem><para>kgdb I/O driver</para>
       <listitem><para>kgdb I/O driver</para>
       <para>
       <para>
-      Each kgdb I/O driver has to provide an implemenation for the following:
+      Each kgdb I/O driver has to provide an implementation for the following:
       <itemizedlist>
       <itemizedlist>
-      <listitem><para>configuration via builtin or module</para></listitem>
+      <listitem><para>configuration via built-in or module</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>dynamic configuration and kgdb hook registration calls</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>dynamic configuration and kgdb hook registration calls</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>read and write character interface</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>read and write character interface</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>A cleanup handler for unconfiguring from the kgdb core</para></listitem>
       <listitem><para>A cleanup handler for unconfiguring from the kgdb core</para></listitem>
@@ -416,15 +752,15 @@
   underlying low level to the hardware driver having "polling hooks"
   underlying low level to the hardware driver having "polling hooks"
   which the to which the tty driver is attached.  In the initial
   which the to which the tty driver is attached.  In the initial
   implementation of kgdboc it the serial_core was changed to expose a
   implementation of kgdboc it the serial_core was changed to expose a
-  low level uart hook for doing polled mode reading and writing of a
+  low level UART hook for doing polled mode reading and writing of a
   single character while in an atomic context.  When kgdb makes an I/O
   single character while in an atomic context.  When kgdb makes an I/O
   request to the debugger, kgdboc invokes a call back in the serial
   request to the debugger, kgdboc invokes a call back in the serial
-  core which in turn uses the call back in the uart driver.  It is
-  certainly possible to extend kgdboc to work with non-uart based
+  core which in turn uses the call back in the UART driver.  It is
+  certainly possible to extend kgdboc to work with non-UART based
   consoles in the future.
   consoles in the future.
   </para>
   </para>
   <para>
   <para>
-  When using kgdboc with a uart, the uart driver must implement two callbacks in the <constant>struct uart_ops</constant>. Example from drivers/8250.c:<programlisting>
+  When using kgdboc with a UART, the UART driver must implement two callbacks in the <constant>struct uart_ops</constant>. Example from drivers/8250.c:<programlisting>
 #ifdef CONFIG_CONSOLE_POLL
 #ifdef CONFIG_CONSOLE_POLL
 	.poll_get_char = serial8250_get_poll_char,
 	.poll_get_char = serial8250_get_poll_char,
 	.poll_put_char = serial8250_put_poll_char,
 	.poll_put_char = serial8250_put_poll_char,
@@ -434,7 +770,7 @@
   <constant>#ifdef CONFIG_CONSOLE_POLL</constant>, as shown above.
   <constant>#ifdef CONFIG_CONSOLE_POLL</constant>, as shown above.
   Keep in mind that polling hooks have to be implemented in such a way
   Keep in mind that polling hooks have to be implemented in such a way
   that they can be called from an atomic context and have to restore
   that they can be called from an atomic context and have to restore
-  the state of the uart chip on return such that the system can return
+  the state of the UART chip on return such that the system can return
   to normal when the debugger detaches.  You need to be very careful
   to normal when the debugger detaches.  You need to be very careful
   with any kind of lock you consider, because failing here is most
   with any kind of lock you consider, because failing here is most
   going to mean pressing the reset button.
   going to mean pressing the reset button.
@@ -453,6 +789,10 @@
 		<itemizedlist>
 		<itemizedlist>
 		<listitem><para>Jason Wessel<email>jason.wessel@windriver.com</email></para></listitem>
 		<listitem><para>Jason Wessel<email>jason.wessel@windriver.com</email></para></listitem>
 		</itemizedlist>
 		</itemizedlist>
+                In Jan 2010 this document was updated to include kdb.
+		<itemizedlist>
+		<listitem><para>Jason Wessel<email>jason.wessel@windriver.com</email></para></listitem>
+		</itemizedlist>
 	</para>
 	</para>
   </chapter>
   </chapter>
 </book>
 </book>

+ 29 - 36
Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl

@@ -81,16 +81,14 @@ void (*port_disable) (struct ata_port *);
 	</programlisting>
 	</programlisting>
 
 
 	<para>
 	<para>
-	Called from ata_bus_probe() and ata_bus_reset() error paths,
-	as well as when unregistering from the SCSI module (rmmod, hot
-	unplug).
+	Called from ata_bus_probe() error path, as well as when
+	unregistering from the SCSI module (rmmod, hot unplug).
 	This function should do whatever needs to be done to take the
 	This function should do whatever needs to be done to take the
 	port out of use.  In most cases, ata_port_disable() can be used
 	port out of use.  In most cases, ata_port_disable() can be used
 	as this hook.
 	as this hook.
 	</para>
 	</para>
 	<para>
 	<para>
 	Called from ata_bus_probe() on a failed probe.
 	Called from ata_bus_probe() on a failed probe.
-	Called from ata_bus_reset() on a failed bus reset.
 	Called from ata_scsi_release().
 	Called from ata_scsi_release().
 	</para>
 	</para>
 
 
@@ -107,10 +105,6 @@ void (*dev_config) (struct ata_port *, struct ata_device *);
 	issue of SET FEATURES - XFER MODE, and prior to operation.
 	issue of SET FEATURES - XFER MODE, and prior to operation.
 	</para>
 	</para>
 	<para>
 	<para>
-	Called by ata_device_add() after ata_dev_identify() determines
-	a device is present.
-	</para>
-	<para>
 	This entry may be specified as NULL in ata_port_operations.
 	This entry may be specified as NULL in ata_port_operations.
 	</para>
 	</para>
 
 
@@ -154,8 +148,8 @@ unsigned int (*mode_filter) (struct ata_port *, struct ata_device *, unsigned in
 
 
 	<sect2><title>Taskfile read/write</title>
 	<sect2><title>Taskfile read/write</title>
 	<programlisting>
 	<programlisting>
-void (*tf_load) (struct ata_port *ap, struct ata_taskfile *tf);
-void (*tf_read) (struct ata_port *ap, struct ata_taskfile *tf);
+void (*sff_tf_load) (struct ata_port *ap, struct ata_taskfile *tf);
+void (*sff_tf_read) (struct ata_port *ap, struct ata_taskfile *tf);
 	</programlisting>
 	</programlisting>
 
 
 	<para>
 	<para>
@@ -164,36 +158,35 @@ void (*tf_read) (struct ata_port *ap, struct ata_taskfile *tf);
 	hardware registers / DMA buffers, to obtain the current set of
 	hardware registers / DMA buffers, to obtain the current set of
 	taskfile register values.
 	taskfile register values.
 	Most drivers for taskfile-based hardware (PIO or MMIO) use
 	Most drivers for taskfile-based hardware (PIO or MMIO) use
-	ata_tf_load() and ata_tf_read() for these hooks.
+	ata_sff_tf_load() and ata_sff_tf_read() for these hooks.
 	</para>
 	</para>
 
 
 	</sect2>
 	</sect2>
 
 
 	<sect2><title>PIO data read/write</title>
 	<sect2><title>PIO data read/write</title>
 	<programlisting>
 	<programlisting>
-void (*data_xfer) (struct ata_device *, unsigned char *, unsigned int, int);
+void (*sff_data_xfer) (struct ata_device *, unsigned char *, unsigned int, int);
 	</programlisting>
 	</programlisting>
 
 
 	<para>
 	<para>
 All bmdma-style drivers must implement this hook.  This is the low-level
 All bmdma-style drivers must implement this hook.  This is the low-level
 operation that actually copies the data bytes during a PIO data
 operation that actually copies the data bytes during a PIO data
 transfer.
 transfer.
-Typically the driver
-will choose one of ata_pio_data_xfer_noirq(), ata_pio_data_xfer(), or
-ata_mmio_data_xfer().
+Typically the driver will choose one of ata_sff_data_xfer_noirq(),
+ata_sff_data_xfer(), or ata_sff_data_xfer32().
 	</para>
 	</para>
 
 
 	</sect2>
 	</sect2>
 
 
 	<sect2><title>ATA command execute</title>
 	<sect2><title>ATA command execute</title>
 	<programlisting>
 	<programlisting>
-void (*exec_command)(struct ata_port *ap, struct ata_taskfile *tf);
+void (*sff_exec_command)(struct ata_port *ap, struct ata_taskfile *tf);
 	</programlisting>
 	</programlisting>
 
 
 	<para>
 	<para>
 	causes an ATA command, previously loaded with
 	causes an ATA command, previously loaded with
 	->tf_load(), to be initiated in hardware.
 	->tf_load(), to be initiated in hardware.
-	Most drivers for taskfile-based hardware use ata_exec_command()
+	Most drivers for taskfile-based hardware use ata_sff_exec_command()
 	for this hook.
 	for this hook.
 	</para>
 	</para>
 
 
@@ -218,8 +211,8 @@ command.
 
 
 	<sect2><title>Read specific ATA shadow registers</title>
 	<sect2><title>Read specific ATA shadow registers</title>
 	<programlisting>
 	<programlisting>
-u8   (*check_status)(struct ata_port *ap);
-u8   (*check_altstatus)(struct ata_port *ap);
+u8   (*sff_check_status)(struct ata_port *ap);
+u8   (*sff_check_altstatus)(struct ata_port *ap);
 	</programlisting>
 	</programlisting>
 
 
 	<para>
 	<para>
@@ -227,20 +220,26 @@ u8   (*check_altstatus)(struct ata_port *ap);
 	hardware.  On some hardware, reading the Status register has
 	hardware.  On some hardware, reading the Status register has
 	the side effect of clearing the interrupt condition.
 	the side effect of clearing the interrupt condition.
 	Most drivers for taskfile-based hardware use
 	Most drivers for taskfile-based hardware use
-	ata_check_status() for this hook.
+	ata_sff_check_status() for this hook.
 	</para>
 	</para>
+
+	</sect2>
+
+	<sect2><title>Write specific ATA shadow register</title>
+	<programlisting>
+void (*sff_set_devctl)(struct ata_port *ap, u8 ctl);
+	</programlisting>
+
 	<para>
 	<para>
-	Note that because this is called from ata_device_add(), at
-	least a dummy function that clears device interrupts must be
-	provided for all drivers, even if the controller doesn't
-	actually have a taskfile status register.
+	Write the device control ATA shadow register to the hardware.
+	Most drivers don't need to define this.
 	</para>
 	</para>
 
 
 	</sect2>
 	</sect2>
 
 
 	<sect2><title>Select ATA device on bus</title>
 	<sect2><title>Select ATA device on bus</title>
 	<programlisting>
 	<programlisting>
-void (*dev_select)(struct ata_port *ap, unsigned int device);
+void (*sff_dev_select)(struct ata_port *ap, unsigned int device);
 	</programlisting>
 	</programlisting>
 
 
 	<para>
 	<para>
@@ -251,9 +250,7 @@ void (*dev_select)(struct ata_port *ap, unsigned int device);
 	</para>
 	</para>
 	<para>
 	<para>
 	Most drivers for taskfile-based hardware use
 	Most drivers for taskfile-based hardware use
-	ata_std_dev_select() for this hook.  Controllers which do not
-	support second drives on a port (such as SATA contollers) will
-	use ata_noop_dev_select().
+	ata_sff_dev_select() for this hook.
 	</para>
 	</para>
 
 
 	</sect2>
 	</sect2>
@@ -441,13 +438,13 @@ void (*irq_clear) (struct ata_port *);
 	to struct ata_host_set.
 	to struct ata_host_set.
 	</para>
 	</para>
 	<para>
 	<para>
-	Most legacy IDE drivers use ata_interrupt() for the
+	Most legacy IDE drivers use ata_sff_interrupt() for the
 	irq_handler hook, which scans all ports in the host_set,
 	irq_handler hook, which scans all ports in the host_set,
 	determines which queued command was active (if any), and calls
 	determines which queued command was active (if any), and calls
-	ata_host_intr(ap,qc).
+	ata_sff_host_intr(ap,qc).
 	</para>
 	</para>
 	<para>
 	<para>
-	Most legacy IDE drivers use ata_bmdma_irq_clear() for the
+	Most legacy IDE drivers use ata_sff_irq_clear() for the
 	irq_clear() hook, which simply clears the interrupt and error
 	irq_clear() hook, which simply clears the interrupt and error
 	flags in the DMA status register.
 	flags in the DMA status register.
 	</para>
 	</para>
@@ -490,16 +487,12 @@ void (*host_stop) (struct ata_host_set *host_set);
 	allocates space for a legacy IDE PRD table and returns.
 	allocates space for a legacy IDE PRD table and returns.
 	</para>
 	</para>
 	<para>
 	<para>
-	->port_stop() is called after ->host_stop().  It's sole function
+	->port_stop() is called after ->host_stop().  Its sole function
 	is to release DMA/memory resources, now that they are no longer
 	is to release DMA/memory resources, now that they are no longer
 	actively being used.  Many drivers also free driver-private
 	actively being used.  Many drivers also free driver-private
 	data from port at this time.
 	data from port at this time.
 	</para>
 	</para>
 	<para>
 	<para>
-	Many drivers use ata_port_stop() as this hook, which frees the
-	PRD table.
-	</para>
-	<para>
 	->host_stop() is called after all ->port_stop() calls
 	->host_stop() is called after all ->port_stop() calls
 have completed.  The hook must finalize hardware shutdown, release DMA
 have completed.  The hook must finalize hardware shutdown, release DMA
 and other resources, etc.
 and other resources, etc.

+ 11 - 0
Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl

@@ -17,6 +17,7 @@
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-DBG-G-REGISTER "<link linkend='vidioc-dbg-g-register'><constant>VIDIOC_DBG_G_REGISTER</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-DBG-G-REGISTER "<link linkend='vidioc-dbg-g-register'><constant>VIDIOC_DBG_G_REGISTER</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-DBG-S-REGISTER "<link linkend='vidioc-dbg-g-register'><constant>VIDIOC_DBG_S_REGISTER</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-DBG-S-REGISTER "<link linkend='vidioc-dbg-g-register'><constant>VIDIOC_DBG_S_REGISTER</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-DQBUF "<link linkend='vidioc-qbuf'><constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-DQBUF "<link linkend='vidioc-qbuf'><constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant></link>">
+<!ENTITY VIDIOC-DQEVENT "<link linkend='vidioc-dqevent'><constant>VIDIOC_DQEVENT</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-ENCODER-CMD "<link linkend='vidioc-encoder-cmd'><constant>VIDIOC_ENCODER_CMD</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-ENCODER-CMD "<link linkend='vidioc-encoder-cmd'><constant>VIDIOC_ENCODER_CMD</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-ENUMAUDIO "<link linkend='vidioc-enumaudio'><constant>VIDIOC_ENUMAUDIO</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-ENUMAUDIO "<link linkend='vidioc-enumaudio'><constant>VIDIOC_ENUMAUDIO</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-ENUMAUDOUT "<link linkend='vidioc-enumaudioout'><constant>VIDIOC_ENUMAUDOUT</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-ENUMAUDOUT "<link linkend='vidioc-enumaudioout'><constant>VIDIOC_ENUMAUDOUT</constant></link>">
@@ -60,6 +61,7 @@
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-REQBUFS "<link linkend='vidioc-reqbufs'><constant>VIDIOC_REQBUFS</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-REQBUFS "<link linkend='vidioc-reqbufs'><constant>VIDIOC_REQBUFS</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-STREAMOFF "<link linkend='vidioc-streamon'><constant>VIDIOC_STREAMOFF</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-STREAMOFF "<link linkend='vidioc-streamon'><constant>VIDIOC_STREAMOFF</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-STREAMON "<link linkend='vidioc-streamon'><constant>VIDIOC_STREAMON</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-STREAMON "<link linkend='vidioc-streamon'><constant>VIDIOC_STREAMON</constant></link>">
+<!ENTITY VIDIOC-SUBSCRIBE-EVENT "<link linkend='vidioc-subscribe-event'><constant>VIDIOC_SUBSCRIBE_EVENT</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-S-AUDIO "<link linkend='vidioc-g-audio'><constant>VIDIOC_S_AUDIO</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-S-AUDIO "<link linkend='vidioc-g-audio'><constant>VIDIOC_S_AUDIO</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-S-AUDOUT "<link linkend='vidioc-g-audioout'><constant>VIDIOC_S_AUDOUT</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-S-AUDOUT "<link linkend='vidioc-g-audioout'><constant>VIDIOC_S_AUDOUT</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-S-CROP "<link linkend='vidioc-g-crop'><constant>VIDIOC_S_CROP</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-S-CROP "<link linkend='vidioc-g-crop'><constant>VIDIOC_S_CROP</constant></link>">
@@ -83,6 +85,7 @@
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-TRY-ENCODER-CMD "<link linkend='vidioc-encoder-cmd'><constant>VIDIOC_TRY_ENCODER_CMD</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-TRY-ENCODER-CMD "<link linkend='vidioc-encoder-cmd'><constant>VIDIOC_TRY_ENCODER_CMD</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-TRY-EXT-CTRLS "<link linkend='vidioc-g-ext-ctrls'><constant>VIDIOC_TRY_EXT_CTRLS</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-TRY-EXT-CTRLS "<link linkend='vidioc-g-ext-ctrls'><constant>VIDIOC_TRY_EXT_CTRLS</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-TRY-FMT "<link linkend='vidioc-g-fmt'><constant>VIDIOC_TRY_FMT</constant></link>">
 <!ENTITY VIDIOC-TRY-FMT "<link linkend='vidioc-g-fmt'><constant>VIDIOC_TRY_FMT</constant></link>">
+<!ENTITY VIDIOC-UNSUBSCRIBE-EVENT "<link linkend='vidioc-subscribe-event'><constant>VIDIOC_UNSUBSCRIBE_EVENT</constant></link>">
 
 
 <!-- Types -->
 <!-- Types -->
 <!ENTITY v4l2-std-id "<link linkend='v4l2-std-id'>v4l2_std_id</link>">
 <!ENTITY v4l2-std-id "<link linkend='v4l2-std-id'>v4l2_std_id</link>">
@@ -141,6 +144,9 @@
 <!ENTITY v4l2-enc-idx "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-enc-idx'>v4l2_enc_idx</link>">
 <!ENTITY v4l2-enc-idx "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-enc-idx'>v4l2_enc_idx</link>">
 <!ENTITY v4l2-enc-idx-entry "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-enc-idx-entry'>v4l2_enc_idx_entry</link>">
 <!ENTITY v4l2-enc-idx-entry "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-enc-idx-entry'>v4l2_enc_idx_entry</link>">
 <!ENTITY v4l2-encoder-cmd "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-encoder-cmd'>v4l2_encoder_cmd</link>">
 <!ENTITY v4l2-encoder-cmd "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-encoder-cmd'>v4l2_encoder_cmd</link>">
+<!ENTITY v4l2-event "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-event'>v4l2_event</link>">
+<!ENTITY v4l2-event-subscription "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-event-subscription'>v4l2_event_subscription</link>">
+<!ENTITY v4l2-event-vsync "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-event-vsync'>v4l2_event_vsync</link>">
 <!ENTITY v4l2-ext-control "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-ext-control'>v4l2_ext_control</link>">
 <!ENTITY v4l2-ext-control "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-ext-control'>v4l2_ext_control</link>">
 <!ENTITY v4l2-ext-controls "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-ext-controls'>v4l2_ext_controls</link>">
 <!ENTITY v4l2-ext-controls "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-ext-controls'>v4l2_ext_controls</link>">
 <!ENTITY v4l2-fmtdesc "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-fmtdesc'>v4l2_fmtdesc</link>">
 <!ENTITY v4l2-fmtdesc "struct&nbsp;<link linkend='v4l2-fmtdesc'>v4l2_fmtdesc</link>">
@@ -200,6 +206,7 @@
 <!ENTITY sub-controls SYSTEM "v4l/controls.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-controls SYSTEM "v4l/controls.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-dev-capture SYSTEM "v4l/dev-capture.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-dev-capture SYSTEM "v4l/dev-capture.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-dev-codec SYSTEM "v4l/dev-codec.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-dev-codec SYSTEM "v4l/dev-codec.xml">
+<!ENTITY sub-dev-event SYSTEM "v4l/dev-event.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-dev-effect SYSTEM "v4l/dev-effect.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-dev-effect SYSTEM "v4l/dev-effect.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-dev-osd SYSTEM "v4l/dev-osd.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-dev-osd SYSTEM "v4l/dev-osd.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-dev-output SYSTEM "v4l/dev-output.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-dev-output SYSTEM "v4l/dev-output.xml">
@@ -292,6 +299,8 @@
 <!ENTITY sub-v4l2grab-c SYSTEM "v4l/v4l2grab.c.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-v4l2grab-c SYSTEM "v4l/v4l2grab.c.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-videodev2-h SYSTEM "v4l/videodev2.h.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-videodev2-h SYSTEM "v4l/videodev2.h.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-v4l2 SYSTEM "v4l/v4l2.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-v4l2 SYSTEM "v4l/v4l2.xml">
+<!ENTITY sub-dqevent SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml">
+<!ENTITY sub-subscribe-event SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-intro SYSTEM "dvb/intro.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-intro SYSTEM "dvb/intro.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-frontend SYSTEM "dvb/frontend.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-frontend SYSTEM "dvb/frontend.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-dvbproperty SYSTEM "dvb/dvbproperty.xml">
 <!ENTITY sub-dvbproperty SYSTEM "dvb/dvbproperty.xml">
@@ -381,3 +390,5 @@
 <!ENTITY reqbufs SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-reqbufs.xml">
 <!ENTITY reqbufs SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-reqbufs.xml">
 <!ENTITY s-hw-freq-seek SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml">
 <!ENTITY s-hw-freq-seek SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-s-hw-freq-seek.xml">
 <!ENTITY streamon SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-streamon.xml">
 <!ENTITY streamon SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-streamon.xml">
+<!ENTITY dqevent SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml">
+<!ENTITY subscribe_event SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml">

+ 7 - 3
Documentation/DocBook/sh.tmpl

@@ -19,13 +19,17 @@
   </authorgroup>
   </authorgroup>
 
 
   <copyright>
   <copyright>
-   <year>2008</year>
+   <year>2008-2010</year>
    <holder>Paul Mundt</holder>
    <holder>Paul Mundt</holder>
   </copyright>
   </copyright>
   <copyright>
   <copyright>
-   <year>2008</year>
+   <year>2008-2010</year>
    <holder>Renesas Technology Corp.</holder>
    <holder>Renesas Technology Corp.</holder>
   </copyright>
   </copyright>
+  <copyright>
+   <year>2010</year>
+   <holder>Renesas Electronics Corp.</holder>
+  </copyright>
 
 
   <legalnotice>
   <legalnotice>
    <para>
    <para>
@@ -77,7 +81,7 @@
   </chapter>
   </chapter>
   <chapter id="clk">
   <chapter id="clk">
     <title>Clock Framework Extensions</title>
     <title>Clock Framework Extensions</title>
-!Iarch/sh/include/asm/clock.h
+!Iinclude/linux/sh_clk.h
   </chapter>
   </chapter>
   <chapter id="mach">
   <chapter id="mach">
     <title>Machine Specific Interfaces</title>
     <title>Machine Specific Interfaces</title>

+ 69 - 57
Documentation/DocBook/v4l/compat.xml

@@ -2332,15 +2332,26 @@ more information.</para>
 	</listitem>
 	</listitem>
       </orderedlist>
       </orderedlist>
     </section>
     </section>
-   </section>
+    <section>
+      <title>V4L2 in Linux 2.6.34</title>
+      <orderedlist>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>Added
+<constant>V4L2_CID_IRIS_ABSOLUTE</constant> and
+<constant>V4L2_CID_IRIS_RELATIVE</constant> controls to the
+	    <link linkend="camera-controls">Camera controls class</link>.
+	  </para>
+	</listitem>
+      </orderedlist>
+    </section>
 
 
-   <section id="other">
-     <title>Relation of V4L2 to other Linux multimedia APIs</title>
+    <section id="other">
+      <title>Relation of V4L2 to other Linux multimedia APIs</title>
 
 
-    <section id="xvideo">
-      <title>X Video Extension</title>
+      <section id="xvideo">
+        <title>X Video Extension</title>
 
 
-      <para>The X Video Extension (abbreviated XVideo or just Xv) is
+        <para>The X Video Extension (abbreviated XVideo or just Xv) is
 an extension of the X Window system, implemented for example by the
 an extension of the X Window system, implemented for example by the
 XFree86 project. Its scope is similar to V4L2, an API to video capture
 XFree86 project. Its scope is similar to V4L2, an API to video capture
 and output devices for X clients. Xv allows applications to display
 and output devices for X clients. Xv allows applications to display
@@ -2351,7 +2362,7 @@ capture or output still images in XPixmaps<footnote>
 extension available across many operating systems and
 extension available across many operating systems and
 architectures.</para>
 architectures.</para>
 
 
-      <para>Because the driver is embedded into the X server Xv has a
+        <para>Because the driver is embedded into the X server Xv has a
 number of advantages over the V4L2 <link linkend="overlay">video
 number of advantages over the V4L2 <link linkend="overlay">video
 overlay interface</link>. The driver can easily determine the overlay
 overlay interface</link>. The driver can easily determine the overlay
 target, &ie; visible graphics memory or off-screen buffers for a
 target, &ie; visible graphics memory or off-screen buffers for a
@@ -2360,16 +2371,16 @@ overlay, scaling or color-keying, or the clipping functions of the
 video capture hardware, always in sync with drawing operations or
 video capture hardware, always in sync with drawing operations or
 windows moving or changing their stacking order.</para>
 windows moving or changing their stacking order.</para>
 
 
-      <para>To combine the advantages of Xv and V4L a special Xv
+        <para>To combine the advantages of Xv and V4L a special Xv
 driver exists in XFree86 and XOrg, just programming any overlay capable
 driver exists in XFree86 and XOrg, just programming any overlay capable
 Video4Linux device it finds. To enable it
 Video4Linux device it finds. To enable it
 <filename>/etc/X11/XF86Config</filename> must contain these lines:</para>
 <filename>/etc/X11/XF86Config</filename> must contain these lines:</para>
-      <para><screen>
+        <para><screen>
 Section "Module"
 Section "Module"
     Load "v4l"
     Load "v4l"
 EndSection</screen></para>
 EndSection</screen></para>
 
 
-      <para>As of XFree86 4.2 this driver still supports only V4L
+        <para>As of XFree86 4.2 this driver still supports only V4L
 ioctls, however it should work just fine with all V4L2 devices through
 ioctls, however it should work just fine with all V4L2 devices through
 the V4L2 backward-compatibility layer. Since V4L2 permits multiple
 the V4L2 backward-compatibility layer. Since V4L2 permits multiple
 opens it is possible (if supported by the V4L2 driver) to capture
 opens it is possible (if supported by the V4L2 driver) to capture
@@ -2377,83 +2388,84 @@ video while an X client requested video overlay. Restrictions of
 simultaneous capturing and overlay are discussed in <xref
 simultaneous capturing and overlay are discussed in <xref
 	  linkend="overlay" /> apply.</para>
 	  linkend="overlay" /> apply.</para>
 
 
-      <para>Only marginally related to V4L2, XFree86 extended Xv to
+        <para>Only marginally related to V4L2, XFree86 extended Xv to
 support hardware YUV to RGB conversion and scaling for faster video
 support hardware YUV to RGB conversion and scaling for faster video
 playback, and added an interface to MPEG-2 decoding hardware. This API
 playback, and added an interface to MPEG-2 decoding hardware. This API
 is useful to display images captured with V4L2 devices.</para>
 is useful to display images captured with V4L2 devices.</para>
-    </section>
+      </section>
 
 
-    <section>
-      <title>Digital Video</title>
+      <section>
+        <title>Digital Video</title>
 
 
-      <para>V4L2 does not support digital terrestrial, cable or
+        <para>V4L2 does not support digital terrestrial, cable or
 satellite broadcast. A separate project aiming at digital receivers
 satellite broadcast. A separate project aiming at digital receivers
 exists. You can find its homepage at <ulink
 exists. You can find its homepage at <ulink
 url="http://linuxtv.org">http://linuxtv.org</ulink>. The Linux DVB API
 url="http://linuxtv.org">http://linuxtv.org</ulink>. The Linux DVB API
 has no connection to the V4L2 API except that drivers for hybrid
 has no connection to the V4L2 API except that drivers for hybrid
 hardware may support both.</para>
 hardware may support both.</para>
-    </section>
+      </section>
 
 
-    <section>
-      <title>Audio Interfaces</title>
+      <section>
+        <title>Audio Interfaces</title>
 
 
-      <para>[to do - OSS/ALSA]</para>
+        <para>[to do - OSS/ALSA]</para>
+      </section>
     </section>
     </section>
-  </section>
 
 
-  <section id="experimental">
-    <title>Experimental API Elements</title>
+    <section id="experimental">
+      <title>Experimental API Elements</title>
 
 
-    <para>The following V4L2 API elements are currently experimental
+      <para>The following V4L2 API elements are currently experimental
 and may change in the future.</para>
 and may change in the future.</para>
 
 
-    <itemizedlist>
-      <listitem>
-	<para>Video Output Overlay (OSD) Interface, <xref
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>Video Output Overlay (OSD) Interface, <xref
 	    linkend="osd" />.</para>
 	    linkend="osd" />.</para>
-      </listitem>
+        </listitem>
 	<listitem>
 	<listitem>
-	<para><constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_OVERLAY</constant>,
+	  <para><constant>V4L2_BUF_TYPE_VIDEO_OUTPUT_OVERLAY</constant>,
 	&v4l2-buf-type;, <xref linkend="v4l2-buf-type" />.</para>
 	&v4l2-buf-type;, <xref linkend="v4l2-buf-type" />.</para>
-      </listitem>
-      <listitem>
-	<para><constant>V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_OUTPUT_OVERLAY</constant>,
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para><constant>V4L2_CAP_VIDEO_OUTPUT_OVERLAY</constant>,
 &VIDIOC-QUERYCAP; ioctl, <xref linkend="device-capabilities" />.</para>
 &VIDIOC-QUERYCAP; ioctl, <xref linkend="device-capabilities" />.</para>
-      </listitem>
-      <listitem>
-	<para>&VIDIOC-ENUM-FRAMESIZES; and
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>&VIDIOC-ENUM-FRAMESIZES; and
 &VIDIOC-ENUM-FRAMEINTERVALS; ioctls.</para>
 &VIDIOC-ENUM-FRAMEINTERVALS; ioctls.</para>
-      </listitem>
-      <listitem>
-	<para>&VIDIOC-G-ENC-INDEX; ioctl.</para>
-      </listitem>
-      <listitem>
-	<para>&VIDIOC-ENCODER-CMD; and &VIDIOC-TRY-ENCODER-CMD;
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>&VIDIOC-G-ENC-INDEX; ioctl.</para>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>&VIDIOC-ENCODER-CMD; and &VIDIOC-TRY-ENCODER-CMD;
 ioctls.</para>
 ioctls.</para>
-      </listitem>
-      <listitem>
-	<para>&VIDIOC-DBG-G-REGISTER; and &VIDIOC-DBG-S-REGISTER;
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>&VIDIOC-DBG-G-REGISTER; and &VIDIOC-DBG-S-REGISTER;
 ioctls.</para>
 ioctls.</para>
-      </listitem>
-      <listitem>
-	<para>&VIDIOC-DBG-G-CHIP-IDENT; ioctl.</para>
-      </listitem>
-    </itemizedlist>
-  </section>
+        </listitem>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para>&VIDIOC-DBG-G-CHIP-IDENT; ioctl.</para>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </section>
 
 
-  <section id="obsolete">
-    <title>Obsolete API Elements</title>
+    <section id="obsolete">
+      <title>Obsolete API Elements</title>
 
 
-    <para>The following V4L2 API elements were superseded by new
+      <para>The following V4L2 API elements were superseded by new
 interfaces and should not be implemented in new drivers.</para>
 interfaces and should not be implemented in new drivers.</para>
 
 
-    <itemizedlist>
-      <listitem>
-	<para><constant>VIDIOC_G_MPEGCOMP</constant> and
+      <itemizedlist>
+        <listitem>
+	  <para><constant>VIDIOC_G_MPEGCOMP</constant> and
 <constant>VIDIOC_S_MPEGCOMP</constant> ioctls. Use Extended Controls,
 <constant>VIDIOC_S_MPEGCOMP</constant> ioctls. Use Extended Controls,
 <xref linkend="extended-controls" />.</para>
 <xref linkend="extended-controls" />.</para>
-      </listitem>
-    </itemizedlist>
+        </listitem>
+      </itemizedlist>
+    </section>
   </section>
   </section>
 
 
   <!--
   <!--

+ 34 - 2
Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml

@@ -266,6 +266,12 @@ minimum value disables backlight compensation.</entry>
 	    <entry>boolean</entry>
 	    <entry>boolean</entry>
 	    <entry>Chroma automatic gain control.</entry>
 	    <entry>Chroma automatic gain control.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_CHROMA_GAIN</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>integer</entry>
+	    <entry>Adjusts the Chroma gain control (for use when chroma AGC
+	    is disabled).</entry>
+	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_COLOR_KILLER</constant></entry>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_COLOR_KILLER</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>boolean</entry>
 	    <entry>boolean</entry>
@@ -277,8 +283,15 @@ minimum value disables backlight compensation.</entry>
 	    <entry>Selects a color effect. Possible values for
 	    <entry>Selects a color effect. Possible values for
 <constant>enum v4l2_colorfx</constant> are:
 <constant>enum v4l2_colorfx</constant> are:
 <constant>V4L2_COLORFX_NONE</constant> (0),
 <constant>V4L2_COLORFX_NONE</constant> (0),
-<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_BW</constant> (1) and
-<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SEPIA</constant> (2).</entry>
+<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_BW</constant> (1),
+<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SEPIA</constant> (2),
+<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_NEGATIVE</constant> (3),
+<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_EMBOSS</constant> (4),
+<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SKETCH</constant> (5),
+<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SKY_BLUE</constant> (6),
+<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_GRASS_GREEN</constant> (7),
+<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_SKIN_WHITEN</constant> (8) and
+<constant>V4L2_COLORFX_VIVID</constant> (9).</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_ROTATE</constant></entry>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_CID_ROTATE</constant></entry>
@@ -1824,6 +1837,25 @@ wide-angle direction. The zoom speed unit is driver-specific.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  </row>
 	  <row><entry></entry></row>
 	  <row><entry></entry></row>
 
 
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_IRIS_ABSOLUTE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+	    <entry>integer</entry>
+	  </row><row><entry spanname="descr">This control sets the
+camera's aperture to the specified value. The unit is undefined.
+Larger values open the iris wider, smaller values close it.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+
+	  <row>
+	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_IRIS_RELATIVE</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
+	    <entry>integer</entry>
+	  </row><row><entry spanname="descr">This control modifies the
+camera's aperture by the specified amount. The unit is undefined.
+Positive values open the iris one step further, negative values close
+it one step further. This is a write-only control.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row><entry></entry></row>
+
 	  <row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_PRIVACY</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
 	    <entry spanname="id"><constant>V4L2_CID_PRIVACY</constant>&nbsp;</entry>
 	    <entry>boolean</entry>
 	    <entry>boolean</entry>

+ 31 - 0
Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-event.xml

@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+  <title>Event Interface</title>
+
+  <para>The V4L2 event interface provides means for user to get
+  immediately notified on certain conditions taking place on a device.
+  This might include start of frame or loss of signal events, for
+  example.
+  </para>
+
+  <para>To receive events, the events the user is interested in first must
+  be subscribed using the &VIDIOC-SUBSCRIBE-EVENT; ioctl. Once an event is
+  subscribed, the events of subscribed types are dequeueable using the
+  &VIDIOC-DQEVENT; ioctl. Events may be unsubscribed using
+  VIDIOC_UNSUBSCRIBE_EVENT ioctl. The special event type V4L2_EVENT_ALL may
+  be used to unsubscribe all the events the driver supports.</para>
+
+  <para>The event subscriptions and event queues are specific to file
+  handles. Subscribing an event on one file handle does not affect
+  other file handles.
+  </para>
+
+  <para>The information on dequeueable events is obtained by using select or
+  poll system calls on video devices. The V4L2 events use POLLPRI events on
+  poll system call and exceptions on select system call.  </para>
+
+  <!--
+Local Variables:
+mode: sgml
+sgml-parent-document: "v4l2.sgml"
+indent-tabs-mode: nil
+End:
+  -->

+ 14 - 4
Documentation/DocBook/v4l/io.xml

@@ -701,6 +701,16 @@ buffer cannot be on both queues at the same time, the
 They can be both cleared however, then the buffer is in "dequeued"
 They can be both cleared however, then the buffer is in "dequeued"
 state, in the application domain to say so.</entry>
 state, in the application domain to say so.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_ERROR</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x0040</entry>
+	    <entry>When this flag is set, the buffer has been dequeued
+	    successfully, although the data might have been corrupted.
+	    This is recoverable, streaming may continue as normal and
+	    the buffer may be reused normally.
+	    Drivers set this flag when the <constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant>
+	    ioctl is called.</entry>
+	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_KEYFRAME</constant></entry>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_KEYFRAME</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>0x0008</entry>
 	    <entry>0x0008</entry>
@@ -918,8 +928,8 @@ order</emphasis>.</para>
 
 
     <para>When the driver provides or accepts images field by field
     <para>When the driver provides or accepts images field by field
 rather than interleaved, it is also important applications understand
 rather than interleaved, it is also important applications understand
-how the fields combine to frames. We distinguish between top and
-bottom fields, the <emphasis>spatial order</emphasis>: The first line
+how the fields combine to frames. We distinguish between top (aka odd) and
+bottom (aka even) fields, the <emphasis>spatial order</emphasis>: The first line
 of the top field is the first line of an interlaced frame, the first
 of the top field is the first line of an interlaced frame, the first
 line of the bottom field is the second line of that frame.</para>
 line of the bottom field is the second line of that frame.</para>
 
 
@@ -972,12 +982,12 @@ between <constant>V4L2_FIELD_TOP</constant> and
 	  <row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_FIELD_TOP</constant></entry>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_FIELD_TOP</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>2</entry>
 	    <entry>2</entry>
-	    <entry>Images consist of the top field only.</entry>
+	    <entry>Images consist of the top (aka odd) field only.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	  <row>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_FIELD_BOTTOM</constant></entry>
 	    <entry><constant>V4L2_FIELD_BOTTOM</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>3</entry>
 	    <entry>3</entry>
-	    <entry>Images consist of the bottom field only.
+	    <entry>Images consist of the bottom (aka even) field only.
 Applications may wish to prevent a device from capturing interlaced
 Applications may wish to prevent a device from capturing interlaced
 images because they will have "comb" or "feathering" artefacts around
 images because they will have "comb" or "feathering" artefacts around
 moving objects.</entry>
 moving objects.</entry>

+ 12 - 0
Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml

@@ -792,6 +792,18 @@ http://www.thedirks.org/winnov/</ulink></para></entry>
 	    <entry>'YYUV'</entry>
 	    <entry>'YYUV'</entry>
 	    <entry>unknown</entry>
 	    <entry>unknown</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  </row>
+	  <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y4">
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y4</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>'Y04 '</entry>
+	    <entry>Old 4-bit greyscale format. Only the least significant 4 bits of each byte are used,
+the other bits are set to 0.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y6">
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y6</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>'Y06 '</entry>
+	    <entry>Old 6-bit greyscale format. Only the least significant 6 bits of each byte are used,
+the other bits are set to 0.</entry>
+	  </row>
 	</tbody>
 	</tbody>
       </tgroup>
       </tgroup>
     </table>
     </table>

+ 3 - 0
Documentation/DocBook/v4l/v4l2.xml

@@ -401,6 +401,7 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list.</revremark>
     <section id="ttx"> &sub-dev-teletext; </section>
     <section id="ttx"> &sub-dev-teletext; </section>
     <section id="radio"> &sub-dev-radio; </section>
     <section id="radio"> &sub-dev-radio; </section>
     <section id="rds"> &sub-dev-rds; </section>
     <section id="rds"> &sub-dev-rds; </section>
+    <section id="event"> &sub-dev-event; </section>
   </chapter>
   </chapter>
 
 
   <chapter id="driver">
   <chapter id="driver">
@@ -426,6 +427,7 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list.</revremark>
     &sub-cropcap;
     &sub-cropcap;
     &sub-dbg-g-chip-ident;
     &sub-dbg-g-chip-ident;
     &sub-dbg-g-register;
     &sub-dbg-g-register;
+    &sub-dqevent;
     &sub-encoder-cmd;
     &sub-encoder-cmd;
     &sub-enumaudio;
     &sub-enumaudio;
     &sub-enumaudioout;
     &sub-enumaudioout;
@@ -467,6 +469,7 @@ and discussions on the V4L mailing list.</revremark>
     &sub-reqbufs;
     &sub-reqbufs;
     &sub-s-hw-freq-seek;
     &sub-s-hw-freq-seek;
     &sub-streamon;
     &sub-streamon;
+    &sub-subscribe-event;
     <!-- End of ioctls. -->
     <!-- End of ioctls. -->
     &sub-mmap;
     &sub-mmap;
     &sub-munmap;
     &sub-munmap;

+ 10 - 0
Documentation/DocBook/v4l/videodev2.h.xml

@@ -1018,6 +1018,13 @@ enum <link linkend="v4l2-colorfx">v4l2_colorfx</link> {
         V4L2_COLORFX_NONE       = 0,
         V4L2_COLORFX_NONE       = 0,
         V4L2_COLORFX_BW         = 1,
         V4L2_COLORFX_BW         = 1,
         V4L2_COLORFX_SEPIA      = 2,
         V4L2_COLORFX_SEPIA      = 2,
+        V4L2_COLORFX_NEGATIVE   = 3,
+        V4L2_COLORFX_EMBOSS     = 4,
+        V4L2_COLORFX_SKETCH     = 5,
+        V4L2_COLORFX_SKY_BLUE   = 6,
+        V4L2_COLORFX_GRASS_GREEN = 7,
+        V4L2_COLORFX_SKIN_WHITEN = 8,
+        V4L2_COLORFX_VIVID      = 9.
 };
 };
 #define V4L2_CID_AUTOBRIGHTNESS                 (V4L2_CID_BASE+32)
 #define V4L2_CID_AUTOBRIGHTNESS                 (V4L2_CID_BASE+32)
 #define V4L2_CID_BAND_STOP_FILTER               (V4L2_CID_BASE+33)
 #define V4L2_CID_BAND_STOP_FILTER               (V4L2_CID_BASE+33)
@@ -1271,6 +1278,9 @@ enum  <link linkend="v4l2-exposure-auto-type">v4l2_exposure_auto_type</link> {
 
 
 #define V4L2_CID_PRIVACY                        (V4L2_CID_CAMERA_CLASS_BASE+16)
 #define V4L2_CID_PRIVACY                        (V4L2_CID_CAMERA_CLASS_BASE+16)
 
 
+#define V4L2_CID_IRIS_ABSOLUTE                  (V4L2_CID_CAMERA_CLASS_BASE+17)
+#define V4L2_CID_IRIS_RELATIVE                  (V4L2_CID_CAMERA_CLASS_BASE+18)
+
 /* FM Modulator class control IDs */
 /* FM Modulator class control IDs */
 #define V4L2_CID_FM_TX_CLASS_BASE               (V4L2_CTRL_CLASS_FM_TX | 0x900)
 #define V4L2_CID_FM_TX_CLASS_BASE               (V4L2_CTRL_CLASS_FM_TX | 0x900)
 #define V4L2_CID_FM_TX_CLASS                    (V4L2_CTRL_CLASS_FM_TX | 1)
 #define V4L2_CID_FM_TX_CLASS                    (V4L2_CTRL_CLASS_FM_TX | 1)

+ 131 - 0
Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-dqevent.xml

@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+<refentry id="vidioc-dqevent">
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle>ioctl VIDIOC_DQEVENT</refentrytitle>
+    &manvol;
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname>VIDIOC_DQEVENT</refname>
+    <refpurpose>Dequeue event</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <funcsynopsis>
+      <funcprototype>
+	<funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>struct v4l2_event
+*<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef>
+      </funcprototype>
+    </funcsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Arguments</title>
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>fd</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>&fd;</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>request</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>VIDIOC_DQEVENT</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>argp</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para></para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Description</title>
+
+    <para>Dequeue an event from a video device. No input is required
+    for this ioctl. All the fields of the &v4l2-event; structure are
+    filled by the driver. The file handle will also receive exceptions
+    which the application may get by e.g. using the select system
+    call.</para>
+
+    <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="v4l2-event">
+      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_event</structname></title>
+      <tgroup cols="4">
+	&cs-str;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>Type of the event.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>union</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>u</structfield></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>&v4l2-event-vsync;</entry>
+            <entry><structfield>vsync</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Event data for event V4L2_EVENT_VSYNC.
+            </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>__u8</entry>
+            <entry><structfield>data</structfield>[64]</entry>
+	    <entry>Event data. Defined by the event type. The union
+            should be used to define easily accessible type for
+            events.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>pending</structfield></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>Number of pending events excluding this one.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>sequence</structfield></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>Event sequence number. The sequence number is
+	    incremented for every subscribed event that takes place.
+	    If sequence numbers are not contiguous it means that
+	    events have been lost.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>struct timespec</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>timestamp</structfield></entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>Event timestamp.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[9]</entry>
+            <entry></entry>
+	    <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Drivers must set
+	    the array to zero.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+
+  </refsect1>
+</refentry>
+<!--
+Local Variables:
+mode: sgml
+sgml-parent-document: "v4l2.sgml"
+indent-tabs-mode: nil
+End:
+-->

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-enuminput.xml

@@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ input/output interface to linux-media@vger.kernel.org on 19 Oct 2009.
 	    <entry>This input supports setting DV presets by using VIDIOC_S_DV_PRESET.</entry>
 	    <entry>This input supports setting DV presets by using VIDIOC_S_DV_PRESET.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  </row>
 	  <row>
 	  <row>
-	    <entry><constant>V4L2_OUT_CAP_CUSTOM_TIMINGS</constant></entry>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_IN_CAP_CUSTOM_TIMINGS</constant></entry>
 	    <entry>0x00000002</entry>
 	    <entry>0x00000002</entry>
 	    <entry>This input supports setting custom video timings by using VIDIOC_S_DV_TIMINGS.</entry>
 	    <entry>This input supports setting custom video timings by using VIDIOC_S_DV_TIMINGS.</entry>
 	  </row>
 	  </row>

+ 12 - 2
Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-qbuf.xml

@@ -111,7 +111,11 @@ from the driver's outgoing queue. They just set the
 and <structfield>reserved</structfield>
 and <structfield>reserved</structfield>
 fields of a &v4l2-buffer; as above, when <constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant>
 fields of a &v4l2-buffer; as above, when <constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant>
 is called with a pointer to this structure the driver fills the
 is called with a pointer to this structure the driver fills the
-remaining fields or returns an error code.</para>
+remaining fields or returns an error code. The driver may also set
+<constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_ERROR</constant> in the <structfield>flags</structfield>
+field. It indicates a non-critical (recoverable) streaming error. In such case
+the application may continue as normal, but should be aware that data in the
+dequeued buffer might be corrupted.</para>
 
 
     <para>By default <constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant> blocks when no
     <para>By default <constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant> blocks when no
 buffer is in the outgoing queue. When the
 buffer is in the outgoing queue. When the
@@ -158,7 +162,13 @@ enqueue a user pointer buffer.</para>
 	  <para><constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant> failed due to an
 	  <para><constant>VIDIOC_DQBUF</constant> failed due to an
 internal error. Can also indicate temporary problems like signal
 internal error. Can also indicate temporary problems like signal
 loss. Note the driver might dequeue an (empty) buffer despite
 loss. Note the driver might dequeue an (empty) buffer despite
-returning an error, or even stop capturing.</para>
+returning an error, or even stop capturing. Reusing such buffer may be unsafe
+though and its details (e.g. <structfield>index</structfield>) may not be
+returned either. It is recommended that drivers indicate recoverable errors
+by setting the <constant>V4L2_BUF_FLAG_ERROR</constant> and returning 0 instead.
+In that case the application should be able to safely reuse the buffer and
+continue streaming.
+	</para>
 	</listitem>
 	</listitem>
       </varlistentry>
       </varlistentry>
     </variablelist>
     </variablelist>

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-queryctrl.xml

@@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ should be part of the control documentation.</entry>
 	    <entry>n/a</entry>
 	    <entry>n/a</entry>
 	    <entry>This is not a control. When
 	    <entry>This is not a control. When
 <constant>VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL</constant> is called with a control ID
 <constant>VIDIOC_QUERYCTRL</constant> is called with a control ID
-equal to a control class code (see <xref linkend="ctrl-class" />), the
+equal to a control class code (see <xref linkend="ctrl-class" />) + 1, the
 ioctl returns the name of the control class and this control type.
 ioctl returns the name of the control class and this control type.
 Older drivers which do not support this feature return an
 Older drivers which do not support this feature return an
 &EINVAL;.</entry>
 &EINVAL;.</entry>

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-reqbufs.xml

@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ fields of the <structname>v4l2_requestbuffers</structname> structure.
 They set the <structfield>type</structfield> field to the respective
 They set the <structfield>type</structfield> field to the respective
 stream or buffer type, the <structfield>count</structfield> field to
 stream or buffer type, the <structfield>count</structfield> field to
 the desired number of buffers, <structfield>memory</structfield>
 the desired number of buffers, <structfield>memory</structfield>
-must be set to the requested I/O method and the reserved array
+must be set to the requested I/O method and the <structfield>reserved</structfield> array
 must be zeroed. When the ioctl
 must be zeroed. When the ioctl
 is called with a pointer to this structure the driver will attempt to allocate
 is called with a pointer to this structure the driver will attempt to allocate
 the requested number of buffers and it stores the actual number
 the requested number of buffers and it stores the actual number

+ 133 - 0
Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-subscribe-event.xml

@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+<refentry id="vidioc-subscribe-event">
+  <refmeta>
+    <refentrytitle>ioctl VIDIOC_SUBSCRIBE_EVENT, VIDIOC_UNSUBSCRIBE_EVENT</refentrytitle>
+    &manvol;
+  </refmeta>
+
+  <refnamediv>
+    <refname>VIDIOC_SUBSCRIBE_EVENT, VIDIOC_UNSUBSCRIBE_EVENT</refname>
+    <refpurpose>Subscribe or unsubscribe event</refpurpose>
+  </refnamediv>
+
+  <refsynopsisdiv>
+    <funcsynopsis>
+      <funcprototype>
+	<funcdef>int <function>ioctl</function></funcdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>fd</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>int <parameter>request</parameter></paramdef>
+	<paramdef>struct v4l2_event_subscription
+*<parameter>argp</parameter></paramdef>
+      </funcprototype>
+    </funcsynopsis>
+  </refsynopsisdiv>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Arguments</title>
+
+    <variablelist>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>fd</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>&fd;</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>request</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para>VIDIOC_SUBSCRIBE_EVENT, VIDIOC_UNSUBSCRIBE_EVENT</para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+      <varlistentry>
+	<term><parameter>argp</parameter></term>
+	<listitem>
+	  <para></para>
+	</listitem>
+      </varlistentry>
+    </variablelist>
+  </refsect1>
+
+  <refsect1>
+    <title>Description</title>
+
+    <para>Subscribe or unsubscribe V4L2 event. Subscribed events are
+    dequeued by using the &VIDIOC-DQEVENT; ioctl.</para>
+
+    <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="v4l2-event-subscription">
+      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_event_subscription</structname></title>
+      <tgroup cols="3">
+	&cs-str;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>type</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>Type of the event.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u32</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>reserved</structfield>[7]</entry>
+	    <entry>Reserved for future extensions. Drivers and applications
+	    must set the array to zero.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+
+    <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="event-type">
+      <title>Event Types</title>
+      <tgroup cols="3">
+	&cs-def;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_ALL</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0</entry>
+	    <entry>All events. V4L2_EVENT_ALL is valid only for
+	    VIDIOC_UNSUBSCRIBE_EVENT for unsubscribing all events at once.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_VSYNC</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>1</entry>
+	    <entry>This event is triggered on the vertical sync.
+	    This event has &v4l2-event-vsync; associated with it.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_EOS</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>2</entry>
+	    <entry>This event is triggered when the end of a stream is reached.
+	    This is typically used with MPEG decoders to report to the application
+	    when the last of the MPEG stream has been decoded.
+	    </entry>
+	  </row>
+	  <row>
+	    <entry><constant>V4L2_EVENT_PRIVATE_START</constant></entry>
+	    <entry>0x08000000</entry>
+	    <entry>Base event number for driver-private events.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+
+    <table frame="none" pgwide="1" id="v4l2-event-vsync">
+      <title>struct <structname>v4l2_event_vsync</structname></title>
+      <tgroup cols="3">
+	&cs-str;
+	<tbody valign="top">
+	  <row>
+	    <entry>__u8</entry>
+	    <entry><structfield>field</structfield></entry>
+	    <entry>The upcoming field. See &v4l2-field;.</entry>
+	  </row>
+	</tbody>
+      </tgroup>
+    </table>
+
+  </refsect1>
+</refentry>
+<!--
+Local Variables:
+mode: sgml
+sgml-parent-document: "v4l2.sgml"
+indent-tabs-mode: nil
+End:
+-->

+ 17 - 10
Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl

@@ -5518,34 +5518,41 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime {
 ]]>
 ]]>
         </programlisting>
         </programlisting>
       </informalexample>
       </informalexample>
+
+      For the raw data, <structfield>size</structfield> field must be
+      set properly.  This specifies the maximum size of the proc file access.
     </para>
     </para>
 
 
     <para>
     <para>
-      The callback is much more complicated than the text-file
-      version. You need to use a low-level I/O functions such as
+      The read/write callbacks of raw mode are more direct than the text mode.
+      You need to use a low-level I/O functions such as
       <function>copy_from/to_user()</function> to transfer the
       <function>copy_from/to_user()</function> to transfer the
       data.
       data.
 
 
       <informalexample>
       <informalexample>
         <programlisting>
         <programlisting>
 <![CDATA[
 <![CDATA[
-  static long my_file_io_read(struct snd_info_entry *entry,
+  static ssize_t my_file_io_read(struct snd_info_entry *entry,
                               void *file_private_data,
                               void *file_private_data,
                               struct file *file,
                               struct file *file,
                               char *buf,
                               char *buf,
-                              unsigned long count,
-                              unsigned long pos)
+                              size_t count,
+                              loff_t pos)
   {
   {
-          long size = count;
-          if (pos + size > local_max_size)
-                  size = local_max_size - pos;
-          if (copy_to_user(buf, local_data + pos, size))
+          if (copy_to_user(buf, local_data + pos, count))
                   return -EFAULT;
                   return -EFAULT;
-          return size;
+          return count;
   }
   }
 ]]>
 ]]>
         </programlisting>
         </programlisting>
       </informalexample>
       </informalexample>
+
+      If the size of the info entry has been set up properly,
+      <structfield>count</structfield> and <structfield>pos</structfield> are
+      guaranteed to fit within 0 and the given size.
+      You don't have to check the range in the callbacks unless any
+      other condition is required.
+
     </para>
     </para>
 
 
   </chapter>
   </chapter>

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/DocBook/writing_usb_driver.tmpl

@@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ static inline void skel_delete (struct usb_skel *dev)
 {
 {
     kfree (dev->bulk_in_buffer);
     kfree (dev->bulk_in_buffer);
     if (dev->bulk_out_buffer != NULL)
     if (dev->bulk_out_buffer != NULL)
-        usb_buffer_free (dev->udev, dev->bulk_out_size,
+        usb_free_coherent (dev->udev, dev->bulk_out_size,
             dev->bulk_out_buffer,
             dev->bulk_out_buffer,
             dev->write_urb->transfer_dma);
             dev->write_urb->transfer_dma);
     usb_free_urb (dev->write_urb);
     usb_free_urb (dev->write_urb);

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/HOWTO

@@ -234,7 +234,7 @@ process is as follows:
     Linus, usually the patches that have already been included in the
     Linus, usually the patches that have already been included in the
     -next kernel for a few weeks.  The preferred way to submit big changes
     -next kernel for a few weeks.  The preferred way to submit big changes
     is using git (the kernel's source management tool, more information
     is using git (the kernel's source management tool, more information
-    can be found at http://git.or.cz/) but plain patches are also just
+    can be found at http://git-scm.com/) but plain patches are also just
     fine.
     fine.
   - After two weeks a -rc1 kernel is released it is now possible to push
   - After two weeks a -rc1 kernel is released it is now possible to push
     only patches that do not include new features that could affect the
     only patches that do not include new features that could affect the

+ 2 - 2
Documentation/PCI/pci-error-recovery.txt

@@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ The driver should return one of the following result codes:
 
 
 		- PCI_ERS_RESULT_NEED_RESET
 		- PCI_ERS_RESULT_NEED_RESET
 		  Driver returns this if it thinks the device is not
 		  Driver returns this if it thinks the device is not
-		  recoverable in it's current state and it needs a slot
+		  recoverable in its current state and it needs a slot
 		  reset to proceed.
 		  reset to proceed.
 
 
 		- PCI_ERS_RESULT_DISCONNECT
 		- PCI_ERS_RESULT_DISCONNECT
@@ -241,7 +241,7 @@ in working condition.
 
 
 The driver is not supposed to restart normal driver I/O operations
 The driver is not supposed to restart normal driver I/O operations
 at this point.  It should limit itself to "probing" the device to
 at this point.  It should limit itself to "probing" the device to
-check it's recoverability status. If all is right, then the platform
+check its recoverability status. If all is right, then the platform
 will call resume() once all drivers have ack'd link_reset().
 will call resume() once all drivers have ack'd link_reset().
 
 
 	Result codes:
 	Result codes:

+ 13 - 16
Documentation/PCI/pcieaer-howto.txt

@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Reporting (AER) driver and provides information on how to use it, as
 well as how to enable the drivers of endpoint devices to conform with
 well as how to enable the drivers of endpoint devices to conform with
 PCI Express AER driver.
 PCI Express AER driver.
 
 
-1.2 Copyright © Intel Corporation 2006.
+1.2 Copyright (C) Intel Corporation 2006.
 
 
 1.3 What is the PCI Express AER Driver?
 1.3 What is the PCI Express AER Driver?
 
 
@@ -71,15 +71,11 @@ console. If it's a correctable error, it is outputed as a warning.
 Otherwise, it is printed as an error. So users could choose different
 Otherwise, it is printed as an error. So users could choose different
 log level to filter out correctable error messages.
 log level to filter out correctable error messages.
 
 
-Below shows an example.
-+------ PCI-Express Device Error -----+
-Error Severity          : Uncorrected (Fatal)
-PCIE Bus Error type     : Transaction Layer
-Unsupported Request     : First
-Requester ID            : 0500
-VendorID=8086h, DeviceID=0329h, Bus=05h, Device=00h, Function=00h
-TLB Header:
-04000001 00200a03 05010000 00050100
+Below shows an example:
+0000:50:00.0: PCIe Bus Error: severity=Uncorrected (Fatal), type=Transaction Layer, id=0500(Requester ID)
+0000:50:00.0:   device [8086:0329] error status/mask=00100000/00000000
+0000:50:00.0:    [20] Unsupported Request    (First)
+0000:50:00.0:   TLP Header: 04000001 00200a03 05010000 00050100
 
 
 In the example, 'Requester ID' means the ID of the device who sends
 In the example, 'Requester ID' means the ID of the device who sends
 the error message to root port. Pls. refer to pci express specs for
 the error message to root port. Pls. refer to pci express specs for
@@ -112,7 +108,7 @@ but the PCI Express link itself is fully functional. Fatal errors, on
 the other hand, cause the link to be unreliable.
 the other hand, cause the link to be unreliable.
 
 
 When AER is enabled, a PCI Express device will automatically send an
 When AER is enabled, a PCI Express device will automatically send an
-error message to the PCIE root port above it when the device captures
+error message to the PCIe root port above it when the device captures
 an error. The Root Port, upon receiving an error reporting message,
 an error. The Root Port, upon receiving an error reporting message,
 internally processes and logs the error message in its PCI Express
 internally processes and logs the error message in its PCI Express
 capability structure. Error information being logged includes storing
 capability structure. Error information being logged includes storing
@@ -198,8 +194,9 @@ to reset link, AER port service driver is required to provide the
 function to reset link. Firstly, kernel looks for if the upstream
 function to reset link. Firstly, kernel looks for if the upstream
 component has an aer driver. If it has, kernel uses the reset_link
 component has an aer driver. If it has, kernel uses the reset_link
 callback of the aer driver. If the upstream component has no aer driver
 callback of the aer driver. If the upstream component has no aer driver
-and the port is downstream port, we will use the aer driver of the
-root port who reports the AER error. As for upstream ports,
+and the port is downstream port, we will perform a hot reset as the
+default by setting the Secondary Bus Reset bit of the Bridge Control
+register associated with the downstream port. As for upstream ports,
 they should provide their own aer service drivers with reset_link
 they should provide their own aer service drivers with reset_link
 function. If error_detected returns PCI_ERS_RESULT_CAN_RECOVER and
 function. If error_detected returns PCI_ERS_RESULT_CAN_RECOVER and
 reset_link returns PCI_ERS_RESULT_RECOVERED, the error handling goes
 reset_link returns PCI_ERS_RESULT_RECOVERED, the error handling goes
@@ -253,11 +250,11 @@ cleanup uncorrectable status register. Pls. refer to section 3.3.
 
 
 4. Software error injection
 4. Software error injection
 
 
-Debugging PCIE AER error recovery code is quite difficult because it
+Debugging PCIe AER error recovery code is quite difficult because it
 is hard to trigger real hardware errors. Software based error
 is hard to trigger real hardware errors. Software based error
-injection can be used to fake various kinds of PCIE errors.
+injection can be used to fake various kinds of PCIe errors.
 
 
-First you should enable PCIE AER software error injection in kernel
+First you should enable PCIe AER software error injection in kernel
 configuration, that is, following item should be in your .config.
 configuration, that is, following item should be in your .config.
 
 
 CONFIG_PCIEAER_INJECT=y or CONFIG_PCIEAER_INJECT=m
 CONFIG_PCIEAER_INJECT=y or CONFIG_PCIEAER_INJECT=m

+ 71 - 23
Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt

@@ -3,35 +3,79 @@ Using RCU's CPU Stall Detector
 The CONFIG_RCU_CPU_STALL_DETECTOR kernel config parameter enables
 The CONFIG_RCU_CPU_STALL_DETECTOR kernel config parameter enables
 RCU's CPU stall detector, which detects conditions that unduly delay
 RCU's CPU stall detector, which detects conditions that unduly delay
 RCU grace periods.  The stall detector's idea of what constitutes
 RCU grace periods.  The stall detector's idea of what constitutes
-"unduly delayed" is controlled by a pair of C preprocessor macros:
+"unduly delayed" is controlled by a set of C preprocessor macros:
 
 
 RCU_SECONDS_TILL_STALL_CHECK
 RCU_SECONDS_TILL_STALL_CHECK
 
 
 	This macro defines the period of time that RCU will wait from
 	This macro defines the period of time that RCU will wait from
 	the beginning of a grace period until it issues an RCU CPU
 	the beginning of a grace period until it issues an RCU CPU
-	stall warning.	It is normally ten seconds.
+	stall warning.	This time period is normally ten seconds.
 
 
 RCU_SECONDS_TILL_STALL_RECHECK
 RCU_SECONDS_TILL_STALL_RECHECK
 
 
 	This macro defines the period of time that RCU will wait after
 	This macro defines the period of time that RCU will wait after
-	issuing a stall warning until it issues another stall warning.
-	It is normally set to thirty seconds.
+	issuing a stall warning until it issues another stall warning
+	for the same stall.  This time period is normally set to thirty
+	seconds.
 
 
 RCU_STALL_RAT_DELAY
 RCU_STALL_RAT_DELAY
 
 
-	The CPU stall detector tries to make the offending CPU rat on itself,
-	as this often gives better-quality stack traces.  However, if
-	the offending CPU does not detect its own stall in the number
-	of jiffies specified by RCU_STALL_RAT_DELAY, then other CPUs will
-	complain.  This is normally set to two jiffies.
+	The CPU stall detector tries to make the offending CPU print its
+	own warnings, as this often gives better-quality stack traces.
+	However, if the offending CPU does not detect its own stall in
+	the number of jiffies specified by RCU_STALL_RAT_DELAY, then
+	some other CPU will complain.  This delay is normally set to
+	two jiffies.
 
 
-The following problems can result in an RCU CPU stall warning:
+When a CPU detects that it is stalling, it will print a message similar
+to the following:
+
+INFO: rcu_sched_state detected stall on CPU 5 (t=2500 jiffies)
+
+This message indicates that CPU 5 detected that it was causing a stall,
+and that the stall was affecting RCU-sched.  This message will normally be
+followed by a stack dump of the offending CPU.  On TREE_RCU kernel builds,
+RCU and RCU-sched are implemented by the same underlying mechanism,
+while on TREE_PREEMPT_RCU kernel builds, RCU is instead implemented
+by rcu_preempt_state.
+
+On the other hand, if the offending CPU fails to print out a stall-warning
+message quickly enough, some other CPU will print a message similar to
+the following:
+
+INFO: rcu_bh_state detected stalls on CPUs/tasks: { 3 5 } (detected by 2, 2502 jiffies)
+
+This message indicates that CPU 2 detected that CPUs 3 and 5 were both
+causing stalls, and that the stall was affecting RCU-bh.  This message
+will normally be followed by stack dumps for each CPU.  Please note that
+TREE_PREEMPT_RCU builds can be stalled by tasks as well as by CPUs,
+and that the tasks will be indicated by PID, for example, "P3421".
+It is even possible for a rcu_preempt_state stall to be caused by both
+CPUs -and- tasks, in which case the offending CPUs and tasks will all
+be called out in the list.
+
+Finally, if the grace period ends just as the stall warning starts
+printing, there will be a spurious stall-warning message:
+
+INFO: rcu_bh_state detected stalls on CPUs/tasks: { } (detected by 4, 2502 jiffies)
+
+This is rare, but does happen from time to time in real life.
+
+So your kernel printed an RCU CPU stall warning.  The next question is
+"What caused it?"  The following problems can result in RCU CPU stall
+warnings:
 
 
 o	A CPU looping in an RCU read-side critical section.
 o	A CPU looping in an RCU read-side critical section.
 	
 	
-o	A CPU looping with interrupts disabled.
+o	A CPU looping with interrupts disabled.  This condition can
+	result in RCU-sched and RCU-bh stalls.
 
 
-o	A CPU looping with preemption disabled.
+o	A CPU looping with preemption disabled.  This condition can
+	result in RCU-sched stalls and, if ksoftirqd is in use, RCU-bh
+	stalls.
+
+o	A CPU looping with bottom halves disabled.  This condition can
+	result in RCU-sched and RCU-bh stalls.
 
 
 o	For !CONFIG_PREEMPT kernels, a CPU looping anywhere in the kernel
 o	For !CONFIG_PREEMPT kernels, a CPU looping anywhere in the kernel
 	without invoking schedule().
 	without invoking schedule().
@@ -39,20 +83,24 @@ o	For !CONFIG_PREEMPT kernels, a CPU looping anywhere in the kernel
 o	A bug in the RCU implementation.
 o	A bug in the RCU implementation.
 
 
 o	A hardware failure.  This is quite unlikely, but has occurred
 o	A hardware failure.  This is quite unlikely, but has occurred
-	at least once in a former life.  A CPU failed in a running system,
+	at least once in real life.  A CPU failed in a running system,
 	becoming unresponsive, but not causing an immediate crash.
 	becoming unresponsive, but not causing an immediate crash.
 	This resulted in a series of RCU CPU stall warnings, eventually
 	This resulted in a series of RCU CPU stall warnings, eventually
 	leading the realization that the CPU had failed.
 	leading the realization that the CPU had failed.
 
 
-The RCU, RCU-sched, and RCU-bh implementations have CPU stall warning.
-SRCU does not do so directly, but its calls to synchronize_sched() will
-result in RCU-sched detecting any CPU stalls that might be occurring.
-
-To diagnose the cause of the stall, inspect the stack traces.  The offending
-function will usually be near the top of the stack.  If you have a series
-of stall warnings from a single extended stall, comparing the stack traces
-can often help determine where the stall is occurring, which will usually
-be in the function nearest the top of the stack that stays the same from
-trace to trace.
+The RCU, RCU-sched, and RCU-bh implementations have CPU stall
+warning.  SRCU does not have its own CPU stall warnings, but its
+calls to synchronize_sched() will result in RCU-sched detecting
+RCU-sched-related CPU stalls.  Please note that RCU only detects
+CPU stalls when there is a grace period in progress.  No grace period,
+no CPU stall warnings.
+
+To diagnose the cause of the stall, inspect the stack traces.
+The offending function will usually be near the top of the stack.
+If you have a series of stall warnings from a single extended stall,
+comparing the stack traces can often help determine where the stall
+is occurring, which will usually be in the function nearest the top of
+that portion of the stack which remains the same from trace to trace.
+If you can reliably trigger the stall, ftrace can be quite helpful.
 
 
 RCU bugs can often be debugged with the help of CONFIG_RCU_TRACE.
 RCU bugs can often be debugged with the help of CONFIG_RCU_TRACE.

+ 0 - 10
Documentation/RCU/torture.txt

@@ -182,16 +182,6 @@ Similarly, sched_expedited RCU provides the following:
 	sched_expedited-torture: Reader Pipe:  12660320201 95875 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
 	sched_expedited-torture: Reader Pipe:  12660320201 95875 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
 	sched_expedited-torture: Reader Batch:  12660424885 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
 	sched_expedited-torture: Reader Batch:  12660424885 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
 	sched_expedited-torture: Free-Block Circulation:  1090795 1090795 1090794 1090793 1090792 1090791 1090790 1090789 1090788 1090787 0
 	sched_expedited-torture: Free-Block Circulation:  1090795 1090795 1090794 1090793 1090792 1090791 1090790 1090789 1090788 1090787 0
-	state: -1 / 0:0 3:0 4:0
-
-As before, the first four lines are similar to those for RCU.
-The last line shows the task-migration state.  The first number is
--1 if synchronize_sched_expedited() is idle, -2 if in the process of
-posting wakeups to the migration kthreads, and N when waiting on CPU N.
-Each of the colon-separated fields following the "/" is a CPU:state pair.
-Valid states are "0" for idle, "1" for waiting for quiescent state,
-"2" for passed through quiescent state, and "3" when a race with a
-CPU-hotplug event forces use of the synchronize_sched() primitive.
 
 
 
 
 USAGE
 USAGE

+ 19 - 16
Documentation/RCU/trace.txt

@@ -256,23 +256,23 @@ o	Each element of the form "1/1 0:127 ^0" represents one struct
 The output of "cat rcu/rcu_pending" looks as follows:
 The output of "cat rcu/rcu_pending" looks as follows:
 
 
 rcu_sched:
 rcu_sched:
-  0 np=255892 qsp=53936 cbr=0 cng=14417 gpc=10033 gps=24320 nf=6445 nn=146741
-  1 np=261224 qsp=54638 cbr=0 cng=25723 gpc=16310 gps=2849 nf=5912 nn=155792
-  2 np=237496 qsp=49664 cbr=0 cng=2762 gpc=45478 gps=1762 nf=1201 nn=136629
-  3 np=236249 qsp=48766 cbr=0 cng=286 gpc=48049 gps=1218 nf=207 nn=137723
-  4 np=221310 qsp=46850 cbr=0 cng=26 gpc=43161 gps=4634 nf=3529 nn=123110
-  5 np=237332 qsp=48449 cbr=0 cng=54 gpc=47920 gps=3252 nf=201 nn=137456
-  6 np=219995 qsp=46718 cbr=0 cng=50 gpc=42098 gps=6093 nf=4202 nn=120834
-  7 np=249893 qsp=49390 cbr=0 cng=72 gpc=38400 gps=17102 nf=41 nn=144888
+  0 np=255892 qsp=53936 rpq=85 cbr=0 cng=14417 gpc=10033 gps=24320 nf=6445 nn=146741
+  1 np=261224 qsp=54638 rpq=33 cbr=0 cng=25723 gpc=16310 gps=2849 nf=5912 nn=155792
+  2 np=237496 qsp=49664 rpq=23 cbr=0 cng=2762 gpc=45478 gps=1762 nf=1201 nn=136629
+  3 np=236249 qsp=48766 rpq=98 cbr=0 cng=286 gpc=48049 gps=1218 nf=207 nn=137723
+  4 np=221310 qsp=46850 rpq=7 cbr=0 cng=26 gpc=43161 gps=4634 nf=3529 nn=123110
+  5 np=237332 qsp=48449 rpq=9 cbr=0 cng=54 gpc=47920 gps=3252 nf=201 nn=137456
+  6 np=219995 qsp=46718 rpq=12 cbr=0 cng=50 gpc=42098 gps=6093 nf=4202 nn=120834
+  7 np=249893 qsp=49390 rpq=42 cbr=0 cng=72 gpc=38400 gps=17102 nf=41 nn=144888
 rcu_bh:
 rcu_bh:
-  0 np=146741 qsp=1419 cbr=0 cng=6 gpc=0 gps=0 nf=2 nn=145314
-  1 np=155792 qsp=12597 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=4 gps=8 nf=3 nn=143180
-  2 np=136629 qsp=18680 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=7 gps=6 nf=0 nn=117936
-  3 np=137723 qsp=2843 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=10 gps=7 nf=0 nn=134863
-  4 np=123110 qsp=12433 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=4 gps=2 nf=0 nn=110671
-  5 np=137456 qsp=4210 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=6 gps=5 nf=0 nn=133235
-  6 np=120834 qsp=9902 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=6 gps=3 nf=2 nn=110921
-  7 np=144888 qsp=26336 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=8 gps=2 nf=0 nn=118542
+  0 np=146741 qsp=1419 rpq=6 cbr=0 cng=6 gpc=0 gps=0 nf=2 nn=145314
+  1 np=155792 qsp=12597 rpq=3 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=4 gps=8 nf=3 nn=143180
+  2 np=136629 qsp=18680 rpq=1 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=7 gps=6 nf=0 nn=117936
+  3 np=137723 qsp=2843 rpq=0 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=10 gps=7 nf=0 nn=134863
+  4 np=123110 qsp=12433 rpq=0 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=4 gps=2 nf=0 nn=110671
+  5 np=137456 qsp=4210 rpq=1 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=6 gps=5 nf=0 nn=133235
+  6 np=120834 qsp=9902 rpq=2 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=6 gps=3 nf=2 nn=110921
+  7 np=144888 qsp=26336 rpq=0 cbr=0 cng=0 gpc=8 gps=2 nf=0 nn=118542
 
 
 As always, this is once again split into "rcu_sched" and "rcu_bh"
 As always, this is once again split into "rcu_sched" and "rcu_bh"
 portions, with CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU kernels having an additional
 portions, with CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU kernels having an additional
@@ -284,6 +284,9 @@ o	"np" is the number of times that __rcu_pending() has been invoked
 o	"qsp" is the number of times that the RCU was waiting for a
 o	"qsp" is the number of times that the RCU was waiting for a
 	quiescent state from this CPU.
 	quiescent state from this CPU.
 
 
+o	"rpq" is the number of times that the CPU had passed through
+	a quiescent state, but not yet reported it to RCU.
+
 o	"cbr" is the number of times that this CPU had RCU callbacks
 o	"cbr" is the number of times that this CPU had RCU callbacks
 	that had passed through a grace period, and were thus ready
 	that had passed through a grace period, and were thus ready
 	to be invoked.
 	to be invoked.

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/Smack.txt

@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ NOTE: Smack labels are limited to 23 characters. The attr command
 If you don't do anything special all users will get the floor ("_")
 If you don't do anything special all users will get the floor ("_")
 label when they log in. If you do want to log in via the hacked ssh
 label when they log in. If you do want to log in via the hacked ssh
 at other labels use the attr command to set the smack value on the
 at other labels use the attr command to set the smack value on the
-home directory and it's contents.
+home directory and its contents.
 
 
 You can add access rules in /etc/smack/accesses. They take the form:
 You can add access rules in /etc/smack/accesses. They take the form:
 
 

+ 2 - 0
Documentation/arm/00-INDEX

@@ -20,6 +20,8 @@ Samsung-S3C24XX
 	- S3C24XX ARM Linux Overview
 	- S3C24XX ARM Linux Overview
 Sharp-LH
 Sharp-LH
 	- Linux on Sharp LH79524 and LH7A40X System On a Chip (SOC)
 	- Linux on Sharp LH79524 and LH7A40X System On a Chip (SOC)
+SPEAr
+	- ST SPEAr platform Linux Overview
 VFP/
 VFP/
 	- Release notes for Linux Kernel Vector Floating Point support code
 	- Release notes for Linux Kernel Vector Floating Point support code
 empeg/
 empeg/

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/arm/SA1100/ADSBitsy

@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ Notes:
 
 
 - The flash on board is divided into 3 partitions.
 - The flash on board is divided into 3 partitions.
   You should be careful to use flash on board.
   You should be careful to use flash on board.
-  It's partition is different from GraphicsClient Plus and GraphicsMaster
+  Its partition is different from GraphicsClient Plus and GraphicsMaster
 
 
 - 16bpp mode requires a different cable than what ships with the board.
 - 16bpp mode requires a different cable than what ships with the board.
   Contact ADS or look through the manual to wire your own. Currently,
   Contact ADS or look through the manual to wire your own. Currently,

+ 60 - 0
Documentation/arm/SPEAr/overview.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+			SPEAr ARM Linux Overview
+			==========================
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+  SPEAr (Structured Processor Enhanced Architecture).
+  weblink : http://www.st.com/spear
+
+  The ST Microelectronics SPEAr range of ARM9/CortexA9 System-on-Chip CPUs are
+  supported by the 'spear' platform of ARM Linux. Currently SPEAr300,
+  SPEAr310, SPEAr320 and SPEAr600 SOCs are supported. Support for the SPEAr13XX
+  series is in progress.
+
+  Hierarchy in SPEAr is as follows:
+
+  SPEAr (Platform)
+	- SPEAr3XX (3XX SOC series, based on ARM9)
+		- SPEAr300 (SOC)
+			- SPEAr300_EVB (Evaluation Board)
+		- SPEAr310 (SOC)
+			- SPEAr310_EVB (Evaluation Board)
+		- SPEAr320 (SOC)
+			- SPEAr320_EVB (Evaluation Board)
+	- SPEAr6XX (6XX SOC series, based on ARM9)
+		- SPEAr600 (SOC)
+			- SPEAr600_EVB (Evaluation Board)
+	- SPEAr13XX (13XX SOC series, based on ARM CORTEXA9)
+		- SPEAr1300 (SOC)
+
+  Configuration
+  -------------
+
+  A generic configuration is provided for each machine, and can be used as the
+  default by
+	make spear600_defconfig
+	make spear300_defconfig
+	make spear310_defconfig
+	make spear320_defconfig
+
+  Layout
+  ------
+
+  The common files for multiple machine families (SPEAr3XX, SPEAr6XX and
+  SPEAr13XX) are located in the platform code contained in arch/arm/plat-spear
+  with headers in plat/.
+
+  Each machine series have a directory with name arch/arm/mach-spear followed by
+  series name. Like mach-spear3xx, mach-spear6xx and mach-spear13xx.
+
+  Common file for machines of spear3xx family is mach-spear3xx/spear3xx.c and for
+  spear6xx is mach-spear6xx/spear6xx.c. mach-spear* also contain soc/machine
+  specific files, like spear300.c, spear310.c, spear320.c and spear600.c.
+  mach-spear* also contains board specific files for each machine type.
+
+
+  Document Author
+  ---------------
+
+  Viresh Kumar, (c) 2010 ST Microelectronics

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/ADC-LH7-Touchscreen

@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ The driver only implements a four-wire touch panel protocol.
 
 
 The touchscreen driver is maintenance free except for the pen-down or
 The touchscreen driver is maintenance free except for the pen-down or
 touch threshold.  Some resistive displays and board combinations may
 touch threshold.  Some resistive displays and board combinations may
-require tuning of this threshold.  The driver exposes some of it's
+require tuning of this threshold.  The driver exposes some of its
 internal state in the sys filesystem.  If the kernel is configured
 internal state in the sys filesystem.  If the kernel is configured
 with it, CONFIG_SYSFS, and sysfs is mounted at /sys, there will be a
 with it, CONFIG_SYSFS, and sysfs is mounted at /sys, there will be a
 directory
 directory

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/atomic_ops.txt

@@ -320,7 +320,7 @@ counter decrement would not become globally visible until the
 obj->active update does.
 obj->active update does.
 
 
 As a historical note, 32-bit Sparc used to only allow usage of
 As a historical note, 32-bit Sparc used to only allow usage of
-24-bits of it's atomic_t type.  This was because it used 8 bits
+24-bits of its atomic_t type.  This was because it used 8 bits
 as a spinlock for SMP safety.  Sparc32 lacked a "compare and swap"
 as a spinlock for SMP safety.  Sparc32 lacked a "compare and swap"
 type instruction.  However, 32-bit Sparc has since been moved over
 type instruction.  However, 32-bit Sparc has since been moved over
 to a "hash table of spinlocks" scheme, that allows the full 32-bit
 to a "hash table of spinlocks" scheme, that allows the full 32-bit

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/blackfin/bfin-gpio-notes.txt

@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
 	void bfin_gpio_irq_free(unsigned gpio);
 	void bfin_gpio_irq_free(unsigned gpio);
 
 
     The request functions will record the function state for a certain pin,
     The request functions will record the function state for a certain pin,
-    the free functions will clear it's function state.
+    the free functions will clear its function state.
     Once a pin is requested, it can't be requested again before it is freed by
     Once a pin is requested, it can't be requested again before it is freed by
     previous caller, otherwise kernel will dump stacks, and the request
     previous caller, otherwise kernel will dump stacks, and the request
     function fail.
     function fail.

+ 3 - 3
Documentation/cachetlb.txt

@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
 
 
 This document describes the cache/tlb flushing interfaces called
 This document describes the cache/tlb flushing interfaces called
 by the Linux VM subsystem.  It enumerates over each interface,
 by the Linux VM subsystem.  It enumerates over each interface,
-describes it's intended purpose, and what side effect is expected
+describes its intended purpose, and what side effect is expected
 after the interface is invoked.
 after the interface is invoked.
 
 
 The side effects described below are stated for a uniprocessor
 The side effects described below are stated for a uniprocessor
@@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ require a whole different set of interfaces to handle properly.
 The biggest problem is that of virtual aliasing in the data cache
 The biggest problem is that of virtual aliasing in the data cache
 of a processor.
 of a processor.
 
 
-Is your port susceptible to virtual aliasing in it's D-cache?
+Is your port susceptible to virtual aliasing in its D-cache?
 Well, if your D-cache is virtually indexed, is larger in size than
 Well, if your D-cache is virtually indexed, is larger in size than
 PAGE_SIZE, and does not prevent multiple cache lines for the same
 PAGE_SIZE, and does not prevent multiple cache lines for the same
 physical address from existing at once, you have this problem.
 physical address from existing at once, you have this problem.
@@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ one way to solve this (in particular SPARC_FLAG_MMAPSHARED).
 Next, you have to solve the D-cache aliasing issue for all
 Next, you have to solve the D-cache aliasing issue for all
 other cases.  Please keep in mind that fact that, for a given page
 other cases.  Please keep in mind that fact that, for a given page
 mapped into some user address space, there is always at least one more
 mapped into some user address space, there is always at least one more
-mapping, that of the kernel in it's linear mapping starting at
+mapping, that of the kernel in its linear mapping starting at
 PAGE_OFFSET.  So immediately, once the first user maps a given
 PAGE_OFFSET.  So immediately, once the first user maps a given
 physical page into its address space, by implication the D-cache
 physical page into its address space, by implication the D-cache
 aliasing problem has the potential to exist since the kernel already
 aliasing problem has the potential to exist since the kernel already

+ 133 - 18
Documentation/cgroups/blkio-controller.txt

@@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ HOWTO
 You can do a very simple testing of running two dd threads in two different
 You can do a very simple testing of running two dd threads in two different
 cgroups. Here is what you can do.
 cgroups. Here is what you can do.
 
 
+- Enable Block IO controller
+	CONFIG_BLK_CGROUP=y
+
 - Enable group scheduling in CFQ
 - Enable group scheduling in CFQ
 	CONFIG_CFQ_GROUP_IOSCHED=y
 	CONFIG_CFQ_GROUP_IOSCHED=y
 
 
@@ -54,32 +57,52 @@ cgroups. Here is what you can do.
 
 
 Various user visible config options
 Various user visible config options
 ===================================
 ===================================
-CONFIG_CFQ_GROUP_IOSCHED
-	- Enables group scheduling in CFQ. Currently only 1 level of group
-	  creation is allowed.
-
-CONFIG_DEBUG_CFQ_IOSCHED
-	- Enables some debugging messages in blktrace. Also creates extra
-	  cgroup file blkio.dequeue.
-
-Config options selected automatically
-=====================================
-These config options are not user visible and are selected/deselected
-automatically based on IO scheduler configuration.
-
 CONFIG_BLK_CGROUP
 CONFIG_BLK_CGROUP
-	- Block IO controller. Selected by CONFIG_CFQ_GROUP_IOSCHED.
+	- Block IO controller.
 
 
 CONFIG_DEBUG_BLK_CGROUP
 CONFIG_DEBUG_BLK_CGROUP
-	- Debug help. Selected by CONFIG_DEBUG_CFQ_IOSCHED.
+	- Debug help. Right now some additional stats file show up in cgroup
+	  if this option is enabled.
+
+CONFIG_CFQ_GROUP_IOSCHED
+	- Enables group scheduling in CFQ. Currently only 1 level of group
+	  creation is allowed.
 
 
 Details of cgroup files
 Details of cgroup files
 =======================
 =======================
 - blkio.weight
 - blkio.weight
-	- Specifies per cgroup weight.
-
+	- Specifies per cgroup weight. This is default weight of the group
+	  on all the devices until and unless overridden by per device rule.
+	  (See blkio.weight_device).
 	  Currently allowed range of weights is from 100 to 1000.
 	  Currently allowed range of weights is from 100 to 1000.
 
 
+- blkio.weight_device
+	- One can specify per cgroup per device rules using this interface.
+	  These rules override the default value of group weight as specified
+	  by blkio.weight.
+
+	  Following is the format.
+
+	  #echo dev_maj:dev_minor weight > /path/to/cgroup/blkio.weight_device
+	  Configure weight=300 on /dev/sdb (8:16) in this cgroup
+	  # echo 8:16 300 > blkio.weight_device
+	  # cat blkio.weight_device
+	  dev     weight
+	  8:16    300
+
+	  Configure weight=500 on /dev/sda (8:0) in this cgroup
+	  # echo 8:0 500 > blkio.weight_device
+	  # cat blkio.weight_device
+	  dev     weight
+	  8:0     500
+	  8:16    300
+
+	  Remove specific weight for /dev/sda in this cgroup
+	  # echo 8:0 0 > blkio.weight_device
+	  # cat blkio.weight_device
+	  dev     weight
+	  8:16    300
+
 - blkio.time
 - blkio.time
 	- disk time allocated to cgroup per device in milliseconds. First
 	- disk time allocated to cgroup per device in milliseconds. First
 	  two fields specify the major and minor number of the device and
 	  two fields specify the major and minor number of the device and
@@ -92,13 +115,105 @@ Details of cgroup files
 	  third field specifies the number of sectors transferred by the
 	  third field specifies the number of sectors transferred by the
 	  group to/from the device.
 	  group to/from the device.
 
 
+- blkio.io_service_bytes
+	- Number of bytes transferred to/from the disk by the group. These
+	  are further divided by the type of operation - read or write, sync
+	  or async. First two fields specify the major and minor number of the
+	  device, third field specifies the operation type and the fourth field
+	  specifies the number of bytes.
+
+- blkio.io_serviced
+	- Number of IOs completed to/from the disk by the group. These
+	  are further divided by the type of operation - read or write, sync
+	  or async. First two fields specify the major and minor number of the
+	  device, third field specifies the operation type and the fourth field
+	  specifies the number of IOs.
+
+- blkio.io_service_time
+	- Total amount of time between request dispatch and request completion
+	  for the IOs done by this cgroup. This is in nanoseconds to make it
+	  meaningful for flash devices too. For devices with queue depth of 1,
+	  this time represents the actual service time. When queue_depth > 1,
+	  that is no longer true as requests may be served out of order. This
+	  may cause the service time for a given IO to include the service time
+	  of multiple IOs when served out of order which may result in total
+	  io_service_time > actual time elapsed. This time is further divided by
+	  the type of operation - read or write, sync or async. First two fields
+	  specify the major and minor number of the device, third field
+	  specifies the operation type and the fourth field specifies the
+	  io_service_time in ns.
+
+- blkio.io_wait_time
+	- Total amount of time the IOs for this cgroup spent waiting in the
+	  scheduler queues for service. This can be greater than the total time
+	  elapsed since it is cumulative io_wait_time for all IOs. It is not a
+	  measure of total time the cgroup spent waiting but rather a measure of
+	  the wait_time for its individual IOs. For devices with queue_depth > 1
+	  this metric does not include the time spent waiting for service once
+	  the IO is dispatched to the device but till it actually gets serviced
+	  (there might be a time lag here due to re-ordering of requests by the
+	  device). This is in nanoseconds to make it meaningful for flash
+	  devices too. This time is further divided by the type of operation -
+	  read or write, sync or async. First two fields specify the major and
+	  minor number of the device, third field specifies the operation type
+	  and the fourth field specifies the io_wait_time in ns.
+
+- blkio.io_merged
+	- Total number of bios/requests merged into requests belonging to this
+	  cgroup. This is further divided by the type of operation - read or
+	  write, sync or async.
+
+- blkio.io_queued
+	- Total number of requests queued up at any given instant for this
+	  cgroup. This is further divided by the type of operation - read or
+	  write, sync or async.
+
+- blkio.avg_queue_size
+	- Debugging aid only enabled if CONFIG_DEBUG_BLK_CGROUP=y.
+	  The average queue size for this cgroup over the entire time of this
+	  cgroup's existence. Queue size samples are taken each time one of the
+	  queues of this cgroup gets a timeslice.
+
+- blkio.group_wait_time
+	- Debugging aid only enabled if CONFIG_DEBUG_BLK_CGROUP=y.
+	  This is the amount of time the cgroup had to wait since it became busy
+	  (i.e., went from 0 to 1 request queued) to get a timeslice for one of
+	  its queues. This is different from the io_wait_time which is the
+	  cumulative total of the amount of time spent by each IO in that cgroup
+	  waiting in the scheduler queue. This is in nanoseconds. If this is
+	  read when the cgroup is in a waiting (for timeslice) state, the stat
+	  will only report the group_wait_time accumulated till the last time it
+	  got a timeslice and will not include the current delta.
+
+- blkio.empty_time
+	- Debugging aid only enabled if CONFIG_DEBUG_BLK_CGROUP=y.
+	  This is the amount of time a cgroup spends without any pending
+	  requests when not being served, i.e., it does not include any time
+	  spent idling for one of the queues of the cgroup. This is in
+	  nanoseconds. If this is read when the cgroup is in an empty state,
+	  the stat will only report the empty_time accumulated till the last
+	  time it had a pending request and will not include the current delta.
+
+- blkio.idle_time
+	- Debugging aid only enabled if CONFIG_DEBUG_BLK_CGROUP=y.
+	  This is the amount of time spent by the IO scheduler idling for a
+	  given cgroup in anticipation of a better request than the exising ones
+	  from other queues/cgroups. This is in nanoseconds. If this is read
+	  when the cgroup is in an idling state, the stat will only report the
+	  idle_time accumulated till the last idle period and will not include
+	  the current delta.
+
 - blkio.dequeue
 - blkio.dequeue
-	- Debugging aid only enabled if CONFIG_DEBUG_CFQ_IOSCHED=y. This
+	- Debugging aid only enabled if CONFIG_DEBUG_BLK_CGROUP=y. This
 	  gives the statistics about how many a times a group was dequeued
 	  gives the statistics about how many a times a group was dequeued
 	  from service tree of the device. First two fields specify the major
 	  from service tree of the device. First two fields specify the major
 	  and minor number of the device and third field specifies the number
 	  and minor number of the device and third field specifies the number
 	  of times a group was dequeued from a particular device.
 	  of times a group was dequeued from a particular device.
 
 
+- blkio.reset_stats
+	- Writing an int to this file will result in resetting all the stats
+	  for that cgroup.
+
 CFQ sysfs tunable
 CFQ sysfs tunable
 =================
 =================
 /sys/block/<disk>/queue/iosched/group_isolation
 /sys/block/<disk>/queue/iosched/group_isolation

+ 2 - 3
Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt

@@ -235,8 +235,7 @@ containing the following files describing that cgroup:
  - cgroup.procs: list of tgids in the cgroup.  This list is not
  - cgroup.procs: list of tgids in the cgroup.  This list is not
    guaranteed to be sorted or free of duplicate tgids, and userspace
    guaranteed to be sorted or free of duplicate tgids, and userspace
    should sort/uniquify the list if this property is required.
    should sort/uniquify the list if this property is required.
-   Writing a tgid into this file moves all threads with that tgid into
-   this cgroup.
+   This is a read-only file, for now.
  - notify_on_release flag: run the release agent on exit?
  - notify_on_release flag: run the release agent on exit?
  - release_agent: the path to use for release notifications (this file
  - release_agent: the path to use for release notifications (this file
    exists in the top cgroup only)
    exists in the top cgroup only)
@@ -573,7 +572,7 @@ void cancel_attach(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp,
 
 
 Called when a task attach operation has failed after can_attach() has succeeded.
 Called when a task attach operation has failed after can_attach() has succeeded.
 A subsystem whose can_attach() has some side-effects should provide this
 A subsystem whose can_attach() has some side-effects should provide this
-function, so that the subsytem can implement a rollback. If not, not necessary.
+function, so that the subsystem can implement a rollback. If not, not necessary.
 This will be called only about subsystems whose can_attach() operation have
 This will be called only about subsystems whose can_attach() operation have
 succeeded.
 succeeded.
 
 

+ 19 - 19
Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt

@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ Nodes to a set of tasks.   In this document "Memory Node" refers to
 an on-line node that contains memory.
 an on-line node that contains memory.
 
 
 Cpusets constrain the CPU and Memory placement of tasks to only
 Cpusets constrain the CPU and Memory placement of tasks to only
-the resources within a tasks current cpuset.  They form a nested
+the resources within a task's current cpuset.  They form a nested
 hierarchy visible in a virtual file system.  These are the essential
 hierarchy visible in a virtual file system.  These are the essential
 hooks, beyond what is already present, required to manage dynamic
 hooks, beyond what is already present, required to manage dynamic
 job placement on large systems.
 job placement on large systems.
@@ -53,11 +53,11 @@ Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt.
 Requests by a task, using the sched_setaffinity(2) system call to
 Requests by a task, using the sched_setaffinity(2) system call to
 include CPUs in its CPU affinity mask, and using the mbind(2) and
 include CPUs in its CPU affinity mask, and using the mbind(2) and
 set_mempolicy(2) system calls to include Memory Nodes in its memory
 set_mempolicy(2) system calls to include Memory Nodes in its memory
-policy, are both filtered through that tasks cpuset, filtering out any
+policy, are both filtered through that task's cpuset, filtering out any
 CPUs or Memory Nodes not in that cpuset.  The scheduler will not
 CPUs or Memory Nodes not in that cpuset.  The scheduler will not
 schedule a task on a CPU that is not allowed in its cpus_allowed
 schedule a task on a CPU that is not allowed in its cpus_allowed
 vector, and the kernel page allocator will not allocate a page on a
 vector, and the kernel page allocator will not allocate a page on a
-node that is not allowed in the requesting tasks mems_allowed vector.
+node that is not allowed in the requesting task's mems_allowed vector.
 
 
 User level code may create and destroy cpusets by name in the cgroup
 User level code may create and destroy cpusets by name in the cgroup
 virtual file system, manage the attributes and permissions of these
 virtual file system, manage the attributes and permissions of these
@@ -121,9 +121,9 @@ Cpusets extends these two mechanisms as follows:
  - Each task in the system is attached to a cpuset, via a pointer
  - Each task in the system is attached to a cpuset, via a pointer
    in the task structure to a reference counted cgroup structure.
    in the task structure to a reference counted cgroup structure.
  - Calls to sched_setaffinity are filtered to just those CPUs
  - Calls to sched_setaffinity are filtered to just those CPUs
-   allowed in that tasks cpuset.
+   allowed in that task's cpuset.
  - Calls to mbind and set_mempolicy are filtered to just
  - Calls to mbind and set_mempolicy are filtered to just
-   those Memory Nodes allowed in that tasks cpuset.
+   those Memory Nodes allowed in that task's cpuset.
  - The root cpuset contains all the systems CPUs and Memory
  - The root cpuset contains all the systems CPUs and Memory
    Nodes.
    Nodes.
  - For any cpuset, one can define child cpusets containing a subset
  - For any cpuset, one can define child cpusets containing a subset
@@ -141,11 +141,11 @@ into the rest of the kernel, none in performance critical paths:
  - in init/main.c, to initialize the root cpuset at system boot.
  - in init/main.c, to initialize the root cpuset at system boot.
  - in fork and exit, to attach and detach a task from its cpuset.
  - in fork and exit, to attach and detach a task from its cpuset.
  - in sched_setaffinity, to mask the requested CPUs by what's
  - in sched_setaffinity, to mask the requested CPUs by what's
-   allowed in that tasks cpuset.
+   allowed in that task's cpuset.
  - in sched.c migrate_live_tasks(), to keep migrating tasks within
  - in sched.c migrate_live_tasks(), to keep migrating tasks within
    the CPUs allowed by their cpuset, if possible.
    the CPUs allowed by their cpuset, if possible.
  - in the mbind and set_mempolicy system calls, to mask the requested
  - in the mbind and set_mempolicy system calls, to mask the requested
-   Memory Nodes by what's allowed in that tasks cpuset.
+   Memory Nodes by what's allowed in that task's cpuset.
  - in page_alloc.c, to restrict memory to allowed nodes.
  - in page_alloc.c, to restrict memory to allowed nodes.
  - in vmscan.c, to restrict page recovery to the current cpuset.
  - in vmscan.c, to restrict page recovery to the current cpuset.
 
 
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ new system calls are added for cpusets - all support for querying and
 modifying cpusets is via this cpuset file system.
 modifying cpusets is via this cpuset file system.
 
 
 The /proc/<pid>/status file for each task has four added lines,
 The /proc/<pid>/status file for each task has four added lines,
-displaying the tasks cpus_allowed (on which CPUs it may be scheduled)
+displaying the task's cpus_allowed (on which CPUs it may be scheduled)
 and mems_allowed (on which Memory Nodes it may obtain memory),
 and mems_allowed (on which Memory Nodes it may obtain memory),
 in the two formats seen in the following example:
 in the two formats seen in the following example:
 
 
@@ -323,17 +323,17 @@ stack segment pages of a task.
 
 
 By default, both kinds of memory spreading are off, and memory
 By default, both kinds of memory spreading are off, and memory
 pages are allocated on the node local to where the task is running,
 pages are allocated on the node local to where the task is running,
-except perhaps as modified by the tasks NUMA mempolicy or cpuset
+except perhaps as modified by the task's NUMA mempolicy or cpuset
 configuration, so long as sufficient free memory pages are available.
 configuration, so long as sufficient free memory pages are available.
 
 
 When new cpusets are created, they inherit the memory spread settings
 When new cpusets are created, they inherit the memory spread settings
 of their parent.
 of their parent.
 
 
 Setting memory spreading causes allocations for the affected page
 Setting memory spreading causes allocations for the affected page
-or slab caches to ignore the tasks NUMA mempolicy and be spread
+or slab caches to ignore the task's NUMA mempolicy and be spread
 instead.    Tasks using mbind() or set_mempolicy() calls to set NUMA
 instead.    Tasks using mbind() or set_mempolicy() calls to set NUMA
 mempolicies will not notice any change in these calls as a result of
 mempolicies will not notice any change in these calls as a result of
-their containing tasks memory spread settings.  If memory spreading
+their containing task's memory spread settings.  If memory spreading
 is turned off, then the currently specified NUMA mempolicy once again
 is turned off, then the currently specified NUMA mempolicy once again
 applies to memory page allocations.
 applies to memory page allocations.
 
 
@@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ pages from the node returned by cpuset_mem_spread_node().
 
 
 The cpuset_mem_spread_node() routine is also simple.  It uses the
 The cpuset_mem_spread_node() routine is also simple.  It uses the
 value of a per-task rotor cpuset_mem_spread_rotor to select the next
 value of a per-task rotor cpuset_mem_spread_rotor to select the next
-node in the current tasks mems_allowed to prefer for the allocation.
+node in the current task's mems_allowed to prefer for the allocation.
 
 
 This memory placement policy is also known (in other contexts) as
 This memory placement policy is also known (in other contexts) as
 round-robin or interleave.
 round-robin or interleave.
@@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ is attached, is subtle.
 If a cpuset has its Memory Nodes modified, then for each task attached
 If a cpuset has its Memory Nodes modified, then for each task attached
 to that cpuset, the next time that the kernel attempts to allocate
 to that cpuset, the next time that the kernel attempts to allocate
 a page of memory for that task, the kernel will notice the change
 a page of memory for that task, the kernel will notice the change
-in the tasks cpuset, and update its per-task memory placement to
+in the task's cpuset, and update its per-task memory placement to
 remain within the new cpusets memory placement.  If the task was using
 remain within the new cpusets memory placement.  If the task was using
 mempolicy MPOL_BIND, and the nodes to which it was bound overlap with
 mempolicy MPOL_BIND, and the nodes to which it was bound overlap with
 its new cpuset, then the task will continue to use whatever subset
 its new cpuset, then the task will continue to use whatever subset
@@ -603,13 +603,13 @@ was using MPOL_BIND and now none of its MPOL_BIND nodes are allowed
 in the new cpuset, then the task will be essentially treated as if it
 in the new cpuset, then the task will be essentially treated as if it
 was MPOL_BIND bound to the new cpuset (even though its NUMA placement,
 was MPOL_BIND bound to the new cpuset (even though its NUMA placement,
 as queried by get_mempolicy(), doesn't change).  If a task is moved
 as queried by get_mempolicy(), doesn't change).  If a task is moved
-from one cpuset to another, then the kernel will adjust the tasks
+from one cpuset to another, then the kernel will adjust the task's
 memory placement, as above, the next time that the kernel attempts
 memory placement, as above, the next time that the kernel attempts
 to allocate a page of memory for that task.
 to allocate a page of memory for that task.
 
 
 If a cpuset has its 'cpuset.cpus' modified, then each task in that cpuset
 If a cpuset has its 'cpuset.cpus' modified, then each task in that cpuset
 will have its allowed CPU placement changed immediately.  Similarly,
 will have its allowed CPU placement changed immediately.  Similarly,
-if a tasks pid is written to another cpusets 'cpuset.tasks' file, then its
+if a task's pid is written to another cpusets 'cpuset.tasks' file, then its
 allowed CPU placement is changed immediately.  If such a task had been
 allowed CPU placement is changed immediately.  If such a task had been
 bound to some subset of its cpuset using the sched_setaffinity() call,
 bound to some subset of its cpuset using the sched_setaffinity() call,
 the task will be allowed to run on any CPU allowed in its new cpuset,
 the task will be allowed to run on any CPU allowed in its new cpuset,
@@ -626,16 +626,16 @@ cpusets memory placement policy 'cpuset.mems' subsequently changes.
 If the cpuset flag file 'cpuset.memory_migrate' is set true, then when
 If the cpuset flag file 'cpuset.memory_migrate' is set true, then when
 tasks are attached to that cpuset, any pages that task had
 tasks are attached to that cpuset, any pages that task had
 allocated to it on nodes in its previous cpuset are migrated
 allocated to it on nodes in its previous cpuset are migrated
-to the tasks new cpuset. The relative placement of the page within
+to the task's new cpuset. The relative placement of the page within
 the cpuset is preserved during these migration operations if possible.
 the cpuset is preserved during these migration operations if possible.
 For example if the page was on the second valid node of the prior cpuset
 For example if the page was on the second valid node of the prior cpuset
 then the page will be placed on the second valid node of the new cpuset.
 then the page will be placed on the second valid node of the new cpuset.
 
 
-Also if 'cpuset.memory_migrate' is set true, then if that cpusets
+Also if 'cpuset.memory_migrate' is set true, then if that cpuset's
 'cpuset.mems' file is modified, pages allocated to tasks in that
 'cpuset.mems' file is modified, pages allocated to tasks in that
 cpuset, that were on nodes in the previous setting of 'cpuset.mems',
 cpuset, that were on nodes in the previous setting of 'cpuset.mems',
 will be moved to nodes in the new setting of 'mems.'
 will be moved to nodes in the new setting of 'mems.'
-Pages that were not in the tasks prior cpuset, or in the cpusets
+Pages that were not in the task's prior cpuset, or in the cpuset's
 prior 'cpuset.mems' setting, will not be moved.
 prior 'cpuset.mems' setting, will not be moved.
 
 
 There is an exception to the above.  If hotplug functionality is used
 There is an exception to the above.  If hotplug functionality is used
@@ -655,7 +655,7 @@ There is a second exception to the above.  GFP_ATOMIC requests are
 kernel internal allocations that must be satisfied, immediately.
 kernel internal allocations that must be satisfied, immediately.
 The kernel may drop some request, in rare cases even panic, if a
 The kernel may drop some request, in rare cases even panic, if a
 GFP_ATOMIC alloc fails.  If the request cannot be satisfied within
 GFP_ATOMIC alloc fails.  If the request cannot be satisfied within
-the current tasks cpuset, then we relax the cpuset, and look for
+the current task's cpuset, then we relax the cpuset, and look for
 memory anywhere we can find it.  It's better to violate the cpuset
 memory anywhere we can find it.  It's better to violate the cpuset
 than stress the kernel.
 than stress the kernel.
 
 

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt

@@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ Under below explanation, we assume CONFIG_MEM_RES_CTRL_SWAP=y.
 	  we have to check if OLDPAGE/NEWPAGE is a valid page after commit().
 	  we have to check if OLDPAGE/NEWPAGE is a valid page after commit().
 
 
 8. LRU
 8. LRU
-        Each memcg has its own private LRU. Now, it's handling is under global
+        Each memcg has its own private LRU. Now, its handling is under global
 	VM's control (means that it's handled under global zone->lru_lock).
 	VM's control (means that it's handled under global zone->lru_lock).
 	Almost all routines around memcg's LRU is called by global LRU's
 	Almost all routines around memcg's LRU is called by global LRU's
 	list management functions under zone->lru_lock().
 	list management functions under zone->lru_lock().

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt

@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ some of the pages cached in the cgroup (page cache pages).
 
 
 4.2 Task migration
 4.2 Task migration
 
 
-When a task migrates from one cgroup to another, it's charge is not
+When a task migrates from one cgroup to another, its charge is not
 carried forward by default. The pages allocated from the original cgroup still
 carried forward by default. The pages allocated from the original cgroup still
 remain charged to it, the charge is dropped when the page is freed or
 remain charged to it, the charge is dropped when the page is freed or
 reclaimed.
 reclaimed.

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/connector/connector.txt

@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ int cn_netlink_send(struct cn_msg *msg, u32 __groups, int gfp_mask);
  int gfp_mask			- GFP mask.
  int gfp_mask			- GFP mask.
 
 
  Note: When registering new callback user, connector core assigns
  Note: When registering new callback user, connector core assigns
- netlink group to the user which is equal to it's id.idx.
+ netlink group to the user which is equal to its id.idx.
 
 
 /*****************************************/
 /*****************************************/
 Protocol description.
 Protocol description.

+ 5 - 9
Documentation/credentials.txt

@@ -408,9 +408,6 @@ This should be used inside the RCU read lock, as in the following example:
 		...
 		...
 	}
 	}
 
 
-A function need not get RCU read lock to use __task_cred() if it is holding a
-spinlock at the time as this implicitly holds the RCU read lock.
-
 Should it be necessary to hold another task's credentials for a long period of
 Should it be necessary to hold another task's credentials for a long period of
 time, and possibly to sleep whilst doing so, then the caller should get a
 time, and possibly to sleep whilst doing so, then the caller should get a
 reference on them using:
 reference on them using:
@@ -426,17 +423,16 @@ credentials, hiding the RCU magic from the caller:
 	uid_t task_uid(task)		Task's real UID
 	uid_t task_uid(task)		Task's real UID
 	uid_t task_euid(task)		Task's effective UID
 	uid_t task_euid(task)		Task's effective UID
 
 
-If the caller is holding a spinlock or the RCU read lock at the time anyway,
-then:
+If the caller is holding the RCU read lock at the time anyway, then:
 
 
 	__task_cred(task)->uid
 	__task_cred(task)->uid
 	__task_cred(task)->euid
 	__task_cred(task)->euid
 
 
 should be used instead.  Similarly, if multiple aspects of a task's credentials
 should be used instead.  Similarly, if multiple aspects of a task's credentials
-need to be accessed, RCU read lock or a spinlock should be used, __task_cred()
-called, the result stored in a temporary pointer and then the credential
-aspects called from that before dropping the lock.  This prevents the
-potentially expensive RCU magic from being invoked multiple times.
+need to be accessed, RCU read lock should be used, __task_cred() called, the
+result stored in a temporary pointer and then the credential aspects called
+from that before dropping the lock.  This prevents the potentially expensive
+RCU magic from being invoked multiple times.
 
 
 Should some other single aspect of another task's credentials need to be
 Should some other single aspect of another task's credentials need to be
 accessed, then this can be used:
 accessed, then this can be used:

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/dvb/ci.txt

@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ This application requires the following to function properly as of now.
 
 
 * Cards that fall in this category
 * Cards that fall in this category
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-At present the cards that fall in this category are the Twinhan and it's
+At present the cards that fall in this category are the Twinhan and its
 clones, these cards are available as VVMER, Tomato, Hercules, Orange and
 clones, these cards are available as VVMER, Tomato, Hercules, Orange and
 so on.
 so on.
 
 

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/dvb/contributors.txt

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 Thanks go to the following people for patches and contributions:
 Thanks go to the following people for patches and contributions:
 
 
 Michael Hunold <m.hunold@gmx.de>
 Michael Hunold <m.hunold@gmx.de>
-  for the initial saa7146 driver and it's recent overhaul
+  for the initial saa7146 driver and its recent overhaul
 
 
 Christian Theiss
 Christian Theiss
   for his work on the initial Linux DVB driver
   for his work on the initial Linux DVB driver

+ 84 - 27
Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt

@@ -241,16 +241,6 @@ Who:	Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de>
 
 
 ---------------------------
 ---------------------------
 
 
-What (Why):
-	- xt_recent: the old ipt_recent proc dir
-	  (superseded by /proc/net/xt_recent)
-
-When:	January 2009 or Linux 2.7.0, whichever comes first
-Why:	Superseded by newer revisions or modules
-Who:	Jan Engelhardt <jengelh@computergmbh.de>
-
----------------------------
-
 What:	GPIO autorequest on gpio_direction_{input,output}() in gpiolib
 What:	GPIO autorequest on gpio_direction_{input,output}() in gpiolib
 When:	February 2010
 When:	February 2010
 Why:	All callers should use explicit gpio_request()/gpio_free().
 Why:	All callers should use explicit gpio_request()/gpio_free().
@@ -520,26 +510,21 @@ Who:	Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com>
 
 
 ----------------------------
 ----------------------------
 
 
-What:	corgikbd, spitzkbd, tosakbd driver
-When:	2.6.35
-Files:	drivers/input/keyboard/{corgi,spitz,tosa}kbd.c
-Why:	We now have a generic GPIO based matrix keyboard driver that
-	are fully capable of handling all the keys on these devices.
-	The original drivers manipulate the GPIO registers directly
-	and so are difficult to maintain.
-Who:	Eric Miao <eric.y.miao@gmail.com>
+What:	sysfs-class-rfkill state file
+When:	Feb 2014
+Files:	net/rfkill/core.c
+Why: 	Documented as obsolete since Feb 2010. This file is limited to 3
+	states while the rfkill drivers can have 4 states.
+Who: 	anybody or Florian Mickler <florian@mickler.org>
 
 
 ----------------------------
 ----------------------------
 
 
-What:	corgi_ssp and corgi_ts driver
-When:	2.6.35
-Files:	arch/arm/mach-pxa/corgi_ssp.c, drivers/input/touchscreen/corgi_ts.c
-Why:	The corgi touchscreen is now deprecated in favour of the generic
-	ads7846.c driver. The noise reduction technique used in corgi_ts.c,
-	that's to wait till vsync before ADC sampling, is also integrated into
-	ads7846 driver now. Provided that the original driver is not generic
-	and is difficult to maintain, it will be removed later.
-Who:	Eric Miao <eric.y.miao@gmail.com>
+What: 	sysfs-class-rfkill claim file
+When:	Feb 2012
+Files:	net/rfkill/core.c
+Why:	It is not possible to claim an rfkill driver since 2007. This is
+	Documented as obsolete since Feb 2010.
+Who: 	anybody or Florian Mickler <florian@mickler.org>
 
 
 ----------------------------
 ----------------------------
 
 
@@ -564,6 +549,16 @@ Who:	Avi Kivity <avi@redhat.com>
 
 
 ----------------------------
 ----------------------------
 
 
+What:	xtime, wall_to_monotonic
+When:	2.6.36+
+Files:	kernel/time/timekeeping.c include/linux/time.h
+Why:	Cleaning up timekeeping internal values. Please use
+	existing timekeeping accessor functions to access
+	the equivalent functionality.
+Who:	John Stultz <johnstul@us.ibm.com>
+
+----------------------------
+
 What:	KVM kernel-allocated memory slots
 What:	KVM kernel-allocated memory slots
 When:	July 2010
 When:	July 2010
 Why:	Since 2.6.25, kvm supports user-allocated memory slots, which are
 Why:	Since 2.6.25, kvm supports user-allocated memory slots, which are
@@ -589,3 +584,65 @@ Why:	Useful in 2003, implementation is a hack.
 	Generally invoked by accident today.
 	Generally invoked by accident today.
 	Seen as doing more harm than good.
 	Seen as doing more harm than good.
 Who:	Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
 Who:	Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
+
+----------------------------
+
+What:	iwlwifi 50XX module parameters
+When:	2.6.40
+Why:	The "..50" modules parameters were used to configure 5000 series and
+	up devices; different set of module parameters also available for 4965
+	with same functionalities. Consolidate both set into single place
+	in drivers/net/wireless/iwlwifi/iwl-agn.c
+
+Who:	Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com>
+
+----------------------------
+
+What:	iwl4965 alias support
+When:	2.6.40
+Why:	Internal alias support has been present in module-init-tools for some
+	time, the MODULE_ALIAS("iwl4965") boilerplate aliases can be removed
+	with no impact.
+
+Who:	Wey-Yi Guy <wey-yi.w.guy@intel.com>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:	xt_NOTRACK
+Files:	net/netfilter/xt_NOTRACK.c
+When:	April 2011
+Why:	Superseded by xt_CT
+Who:	Netfilter developer team <netfilter-devel@vger.kernel.org>
+
+---------------------------
+
+What:	video4linux /dev/vtx teletext API support
+When:	2.6.35
+Files:	drivers/media/video/saa5246a.c drivers/media/video/saa5249.c
+	include/linux/videotext.h
+Why:	The vtx device nodes have been superseded by vbi device nodes
+	for many years. No applications exist that use the vtx support.
+	Of the two i2c drivers that actually support this API the saa5249
+	has been impossible to use for a year now and no known hardware
+	that supports this device exists. The saa5246a is theoretically
+	supported by the old mxb boards, but it never actually worked.
+
+	In summary: there is no hardware that can use this API and there
+	are no applications actually implementing this API.
+
+	The vtx support still reserves minors 192-223 and we would really
+	like to reuse those for upcoming new functionality. In the unlikely
+	event that new hardware appears that wants to use the functionality
+	provided by the vtx API, then that functionality should be build
+	around the sliced VBI API instead.
+Who:	Hans Verkuil <hverkuil@xs4all.nl>
+
+----------------------------
+
+What:	IRQF_DISABLED
+When:	2.6.36
+Why:	The flag is a NOOP as we run interrupt handlers with interrupts disabled
+Who:	Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de>
+
+----------------------------
+

+ 2 - 2
Documentation/filesystems/Locking

@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ prototypes:
 locking rules:
 locking rules:
 	All except set_page_dirty may block
 	All except set_page_dirty may block
 
 
-			BKL	PageLocked(page)	i_sem
+			BKL	PageLocked(page)	i_mutex
 writepage:		no	yes, unlocks (see below)
 writepage:		no	yes, unlocks (see below)
 readpage:		no	yes, unlocks
 readpage:		no	yes, unlocks
 sync_page:		no	maybe
 sync_page:		no	maybe
@@ -429,7 +429,7 @@ check_flags:		no
 implementations.  If your fs is not using generic_file_llseek, you
 implementations.  If your fs is not using generic_file_llseek, you
 need to acquire and release the appropriate locks in your ->llseek().
 need to acquire and release the appropriate locks in your ->llseek().
 For many filesystems, it is probably safe to acquire the inode
 For many filesystems, it is probably safe to acquire the inode
-semaphore.  Note some filesystems (i.e. remote ones) provide no
+mutex.  Note some filesystems (i.e. remote ones) provide no
 protection for i_size so you will need to use the BKL.
 protection for i_size so you will need to use the BKL.
 
 
 Note: ext2_release() was *the* source of contention on fs-intensive
 Note: ext2_release() was *the* source of contention on fs-intensive

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt

@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ found to be inadequate, in this case. The Generic Netlink system was
 used for this as raw Netlink would lead to a significant increase in
 used for this as raw Netlink would lead to a significant increase in
 complexity. There's no question that the Generic Netlink system is an
 complexity. There's no question that the Generic Netlink system is an
 elegant solution for common case ioctl functions but it's not a complete
 elegant solution for common case ioctl functions but it's not a complete
-replacement probably because it's primary purpose in life is to be a
+replacement probably because its primary purpose in life is to be a
 message bus implementation rather than specifically an ioctl replacement.
 message bus implementation rather than specifically an ioctl replacement.
 While it would be possible to work around this there is one concern
 While it would be possible to work around this there is one concern
 that lead to the decision to not use it. This is that the autofs
 that lead to the decision to not use it. This is that the autofs

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/filesystems/ceph.txt

@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Mount Options
 	Specify the IP and/or port the client should bind to locally.
 	Specify the IP and/or port the client should bind to locally.
 	There is normally not much reason to do this.  If the IP is not
 	There is normally not much reason to do this.  If the IP is not
 	specified, the client's IP address is determined by looking at the
 	specified, the client's IP address is determined by looking at the
-	address it's connection to the monitor originates from.
+	address its connection to the monitor originates from.
 
 
   wsize=X
   wsize=X
 	Specify the maximum write size in bytes.  By default there is no
 	Specify the maximum write size in bytes.  By default there is no

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/filesystems/dlmfs.txt

@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ You'll want to start heartbeating on a volume which all the nodes in
 your lockspace can access. The easiest way to do this is via
 your lockspace can access. The easiest way to do this is via
 ocfs2_hb_ctl (distributed with ocfs2-tools). Right now it requires
 ocfs2_hb_ctl (distributed with ocfs2-tools). Right now it requires
 that an OCFS2 file system be in place so that it can automatically
 that an OCFS2 file system be in place so that it can automatically
-find it's heartbeat area, though it will eventually support heartbeat
+find its heartbeat area, though it will eventually support heartbeat
 against raw disks.
 against raw disks.
 
 
 Please see the ocfs2_hb_ctl and mkfs.ocfs2 manual pages distributed
 Please see the ocfs2_hb_ctl and mkfs.ocfs2 manual pages distributed

+ 13 - 2
Documentation/filesystems/ext3.txt

@@ -59,8 +59,19 @@ commit=nrsec	(*)	Ext3 can be told to sync all its data and metadata
 			Setting it to very large values will improve
 			Setting it to very large values will improve
 			performance.
 			performance.
 
 
-barrier=1		This enables/disables barriers.  barrier=0 disables
-			it, barrier=1 enables it.
+barrier=<0(*)|1>	This enables/disables the use of write barriers in
+barrier			the jbd code.  barrier=0 disables, barrier=1 enables.
+nobarrier	(*)	This also requires an IO stack which can support
+			barriers, and if jbd gets an error on a barrier
+			write, it will disable again with a warning.
+			Write barriers enforce proper on-disk ordering
+			of journal commits, making volatile disk write caches
+			safe to use, at some performance penalty.  If
+			your disks are battery-backed in one way or another,
+			disabling barriers may safely improve performance.
+			The mount options "barrier" and "nobarrier" can
+			also be used to enable or disable barriers, for
+			consistency with other ext3 mount options.
 
 
 orlov		(*)	This enables the new Orlov block allocator. It is
 orlov		(*)	This enables the new Orlov block allocator. It is
 			enabled by default.
 			enabled by default.

+ 6 - 6
Documentation/filesystems/fiemap.txt

@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ flags, it will return EBADR and the contents of fm_flags will contain
 the set of flags which caused the error. If the kernel is compatible
 the set of flags which caused the error. If the kernel is compatible
 with all flags passed, the contents of fm_flags will be unmodified.
 with all flags passed, the contents of fm_flags will be unmodified.
 It is up to userspace to determine whether rejection of a particular
 It is up to userspace to determine whether rejection of a particular
-flag is fatal to it's operation. This scheme is intended to allow the
+flag is fatal to its operation. This scheme is intended to allow the
 fiemap interface to grow in the future but without losing
 fiemap interface to grow in the future but without losing
 compatibility with old software.
 compatibility with old software.
 
 
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ If this flag is set, the kernel will sync the file before mapping extents.
 
 
 * FIEMAP_FLAG_XATTR
 * FIEMAP_FLAG_XATTR
 If this flag is set, the extents returned will describe the inodes
 If this flag is set, the extents returned will describe the inodes
-extended attribute lookup tree, instead of it's data tree.
+extended attribute lookup tree, instead of its data tree.
 
 
 
 
 Extent Mapping
 Extent Mapping
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ struct fiemap_extent {
 };
 };
 
 
 All offsets and lengths are in bytes and mirror those on disk.  It is valid
 All offsets and lengths are in bytes and mirror those on disk.  It is valid
-for an extents logical offset to start before the request or it's logical
+for an extents logical offset to start before the request or its logical
 length to extend past the request.  Unless FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED is
 length to extend past the request.  Unless FIEMAP_EXTENT_NOT_ALIGNED is
 returned, fe_logical, fe_physical, and fe_length will be aligned to the
 returned, fe_logical, fe_physical, and fe_length will be aligned to the
 block size of the file system.  With the exception of extents flagged as
 block size of the file system.  With the exception of extents flagged as
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ been allocated for the file yet.
 
 
 * FIEMAP_EXTENT_DELALLOC
 * FIEMAP_EXTENT_DELALLOC
   - This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNKNOWN.
   - This will also set FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNKNOWN.
-Delayed allocation - while there is data for this extent, it's
+Delayed allocation - while there is data for this extent, its
 physical location has not been allocated yet.
 physical location has not been allocated yet.
 
 
 * FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED
 * FIEMAP_EXTENT_ENCODED
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Data is located within a meta data block.
 Data is packed into a block with data from other files.
 Data is packed into a block with data from other files.
 
 
 * FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNWRITTEN
 * FIEMAP_EXTENT_UNWRITTEN
-Unwritten extent - the extent is allocated but it's data has not been
+Unwritten extent - the extent is allocated but its data has not been
 initialized.  This indicates the extent's data will be all zero if read
 initialized.  This indicates the extent's data will be all zero if read
 through the filesystem but the contents are undefined if read directly from
 through the filesystem but the contents are undefined if read directly from
 the device.
 the device.
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ VFS -> File System Implementation
 
 
 File systems wishing to support fiemap must implement a ->fiemap callback on
 File systems wishing to support fiemap must implement a ->fiemap callback on
 their inode_operations structure. The fs ->fiemap call is responsible for
 their inode_operations structure. The fs ->fiemap call is responsible for
-defining it's set of supported fiemap flags, and calling a helper function on
+defining its set of supported fiemap flags, and calling a helper function on
 each discovered extent:
 each discovered extent:
 
 
 struct inode_operations {
 struct inode_operations {

+ 2 - 2
Documentation/filesystems/fuse.txt

@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Mount options
 'default_permissions'
 'default_permissions'
 
 
   By default FUSE doesn't check file access permissions, the
   By default FUSE doesn't check file access permissions, the
-  filesystem is free to implement it's access policy or leave it to
+  filesystem is free to implement its access policy or leave it to
   the underlying file access mechanism (e.g. in case of network
   the underlying file access mechanism (e.g. in case of network
   filesystems).  This option enables permission checking, restricting
   filesystems).  This option enables permission checking, restricting
   access based on file mode.  It is usually useful together with the
   access based on file mode.  It is usually useful together with the
@@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ or may honor them by sending a reply to the _original_ request, with
 the error set to EINTR.
 the error set to EINTR.
 
 
 It is also possible that there's a race between processing the
 It is also possible that there's a race between processing the
-original request and it's INTERRUPT request.  There are two possibilities:
+original request and its INTERRUPT request.  There are two possibilities:
 
 
   1) The INTERRUPT request is processed before the original request is
   1) The INTERRUPT request is processed before the original request is
      processed
      processed

+ 6 - 6
Documentation/filesystems/gfs2.txt

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 Global File System
 Global File System
 ------------------
 ------------------
 
 
-http://sources.redhat.com/cluster/
+http://sources.redhat.com/cluster/wiki/
 
 
 GFS is a cluster file system. It allows a cluster of computers to
 GFS is a cluster file system. It allows a cluster of computers to
 simultaneously use a block device that is shared between them (with FC,
 simultaneously use a block device that is shared between them (with FC,
@@ -36,11 +36,11 @@ GFS2 is not on-disk compatible with previous versions of GFS, but it
 is pretty close.
 is pretty close.
 
 
 The following man pages can be found at the URL above:
 The following man pages can be found at the URL above:
-  fsck.gfs2	to repair a filesystem
-  gfs2_grow	to expand a filesystem online
-  gfs2_jadd	to add journals to a filesystem online
-  gfs2_tool	to manipulate, examine and tune a filesystem
+  fsck.gfs2		to repair a filesystem
+  gfs2_grow		to expand a filesystem online
+  gfs2_jadd		to add journals to a filesystem online
+  gfs2_tool		to manipulate, examine and tune a filesystem
   gfs2_quota	to examine and change quota values in a filesystem
   gfs2_quota	to examine and change quota values in a filesystem
   gfs2_convert	to convert a gfs filesystem to gfs2 in-place
   gfs2_convert	to convert a gfs filesystem to gfs2 in-place
   mount.gfs2	to help mount(8) mount a filesystem
   mount.gfs2	to help mount(8) mount a filesystem
-  mkfs.gfs2	to make a filesystem
+  mkfs.gfs2		to make a filesystem

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/filesystems/hpfs.txt

@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ to analyze or change OS2SYS.INI.
 Codepages
 Codepages
 
 
 HPFS can contain several uppercasing tables for several codepages and each
 HPFS can contain several uppercasing tables for several codepages and each
-file has a pointer to codepage it's name is in. However OS/2 was created in
+file has a pointer to codepage its name is in. However OS/2 was created in
 America where people don't care much about codepages and so multiple codepages
 America where people don't care much about codepages and so multiple codepages
 support is quite buggy. I have Czech OS/2 working in codepage 852 on my disk.
 support is quite buggy. I have Czech OS/2 working in codepage 852 on my disk.
 Once I booted English OS/2 working in cp 850 and I created a file on my 852
 Once I booted English OS/2 working in cp 850 and I created a file on my 852

+ 4 - 4
Documentation/filesystems/logfs.txt

@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Levels
 ------
 ------
 
 
 Garbage collection (GC) may fail if all data is written
 Garbage collection (GC) may fail if all data is written
-indiscriminately.  One requirement of GC is that data is seperated
+indiscriminately.  One requirement of GC is that data is separated
 roughly according to the distance between the tree root and the data.
 roughly according to the distance between the tree root and the data.
 Effectively that means all file data is on level 0, indirect blocks
 Effectively that means all file data is on level 0, indirect blocks
 are on levels 1, 2, 3 4 or 5 for 1x, 2x, 3x, 4x or 5x indirect blocks,
 are on levels 1, 2, 3 4 or 5 for 1x, 2x, 3x, 4x or 5x indirect blocks,
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ respectively.  Inode file data is on level 6 for the inodes and 7-11
 for indirect blocks.
 for indirect blocks.
 
 
 Each segment contains objects of a single level only.  As a result,
 Each segment contains objects of a single level only.  As a result,
-each level requires its own seperate segment to be open for writing.
+each level requires its own separate segment to be open for writing.
 
 
 Inode File
 Inode File
 ----------
 ----------
@@ -106,9 +106,9 @@ Vim
 ---
 ---
 
 
 By cleverly predicting the life time of data, it is possible to
 By cleverly predicting the life time of data, it is possible to
-seperate long-living data from short-living data and thereby reduce
+separate long-living data from short-living data and thereby reduce
 the GC overhead later.  Each type of distinc life expectency (vim) can
 the GC overhead later.  Each type of distinc life expectency (vim) can
-have a seperate segment open for writing.  Each (level, vim) tupel can
+have a separate segment open for writing.  Each (level, vim) tupel can
 be open just once.  If an open segment with unknown vim is encountered
 be open just once.  If an open segment with unknown vim is encountered
 at mount time, it is closed and ignored henceforth.
 at mount time, it is closed and ignored henceforth.
 
 

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs41-server.txt

@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ NS*| OPENATTR             | OPT        |              | Section 18.17  |
    | READ                 | REQ        |              | Section 18.22  |
    | READ                 | REQ        |              | Section 18.22  |
    | READDIR              | REQ        |              | Section 18.23  |
    | READDIR              | REQ        |              | Section 18.23  |
    | READLINK             | OPT        |              | Section 18.24  |
    | READLINK             | OPT        |              | Section 18.24  |
-NS | RECLAIM_COMPLETE     | REQ        |              | Section 18.51  |
+   | RECLAIM_COMPLETE     | REQ        |              | Section 18.51  |
    | RELEASE_LOCKOWNER    | MNI        |              | N/A            |
    | RELEASE_LOCKOWNER    | MNI        |              | N/A            |
    | REMOVE               | REQ        |              | Section 18.25  |
    | REMOVE               | REQ        |              | Section 18.25  |
    | RENAME               | REQ        |              | Section 18.26  |
    | RENAME               | REQ        |              | Section 18.26  |

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/filesystems/nfs/rpc-cache.txt

@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ failed lookup meant a definite 'no'.
 request/response format
 request/response format
 -----------------------
 -----------------------
 
 
-While each cache is free to use it's own format for requests
+While each cache is free to use its own format for requests
 and responses over channel, the following is recommended as
 and responses over channel, the following is recommended as
 appropriate and support routines are available to help:
 appropriate and support routines are available to help:
 Each request or response record should be printable ASCII
 Each request or response record should be printable ASCII

+ 2 - 2
Documentation/filesystems/nilfs2.txt

@@ -50,8 +50,8 @@ NILFS2 supports the following mount options:
 (*) == default
 (*) == default
 
 
 nobarrier		Disables barriers.
 nobarrier		Disables barriers.
-errors=continue(*)	Keep going on a filesystem error.
-errors=remount-ro	Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
+errors=continue		Keep going on a filesystem error.
+errors=remount-ro(*)	Remount the filesystem read-only on an error.
 errors=panic		Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs.
 errors=panic		Panic and halt the machine if an error occurs.
 cp=n			Specify the checkpoint-number of the snapshot to be
 cp=n			Specify the checkpoint-number of the snapshot to be
 			mounted.  Checkpoints and snapshots are listed by lscp
 			mounted.  Checkpoints and snapshots are listed by lscp

+ 7 - 0
Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt

@@ -80,3 +80,10 @@ user_xattr	(*)	Enables Extended User Attributes.
 nouser_xattr		Disables Extended User Attributes.
 nouser_xattr		Disables Extended User Attributes.
 acl			Enables POSIX Access Control Lists support.
 acl			Enables POSIX Access Control Lists support.
 noacl		(*)	Disables POSIX Access Control Lists support.
 noacl		(*)	Disables POSIX Access Control Lists support.
+resv_level=2	(*)	Set how agressive allocation reservations will be.
+			Valid values are between 0 (reservations off) to 8
+			(maximum space for reservations).
+dir_resv_level=	(*)	By default, directory reservations will scale with file
+			reservations - users should rarely need to change this
+			value. If allocation reservations are turned off, this
+			option will have no effect.

+ 8 - 5
Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt

@@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ Table 1-4: Contents of the stat files (as of 2.6.30-rc7)
   cgtime        guest time of the task children in jiffies
   cgtime        guest time of the task children in jiffies
 ..............................................................................
 ..............................................................................
 
 
-The /proc/PID/map file containing the currently mapped memory regions and
+The /proc/PID/maps file containing the currently mapped memory regions and
 their access permissions.
 their access permissions.
 
 
 The format is:
 The format is:
@@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ address           perms offset  dev   inode      pathname
 08049000-0804a000 rw-p 00001000 03:00 8312       /opt/test
 08049000-0804a000 rw-p 00001000 03:00 8312       /opt/test
 0804a000-0806b000 rw-p 00000000 00:00 0          [heap]
 0804a000-0806b000 rw-p 00000000 00:00 0          [heap]
 a7cb1000-a7cb2000 ---p 00000000 00:00 0
 a7cb1000-a7cb2000 ---p 00000000 00:00 0
-a7cb2000-a7eb2000 rw-p 00000000 00:00 0          [threadstack:001ff4b4]
+a7cb2000-a7eb2000 rw-p 00000000 00:00 0
 a7eb2000-a7eb3000 ---p 00000000 00:00 0
 a7eb2000-a7eb3000 ---p 00000000 00:00 0
 a7eb3000-a7ed5000 rw-p 00000000 00:00 0
 a7eb3000-a7ed5000 rw-p 00000000 00:00 0
 a7ed5000-a8008000 r-xp 00000000 03:00 4222       /lib/libc.so.6
 a7ed5000-a8008000 r-xp 00000000 03:00 4222       /lib/libc.so.6
@@ -352,7 +352,6 @@ is not associated with a file:
  [stack]                  = the stack of the main process
  [stack]                  = the stack of the main process
  [vdso]                   = the "virtual dynamic shared object",
  [vdso]                   = the "virtual dynamic shared object",
                             the kernel system call handler
                             the kernel system call handler
- [threadstack:xxxxxxxx]   = the stack of the thread, xxxxxxxx is the stack size
 
 
  or if empty, the mapping is anonymous.
  or if empty, the mapping is anonymous.
 
 
@@ -566,6 +565,10 @@ The default_smp_affinity mask applies to all non-active IRQs, which are the
 IRQs which have not yet been allocated/activated, and hence which lack a
 IRQs which have not yet been allocated/activated, and hence which lack a
 /proc/irq/[0-9]* directory.
 /proc/irq/[0-9]* directory.
 
 
+The node file on an SMP system shows the node to which the device using the IRQ
+reports itself as being attached. This hardware locality information does not
+include information about any possible driver locality preference.
+
 prof_cpu_mask specifies which CPUs are to be profiled by the system wide
 prof_cpu_mask specifies which CPUs are to be profiled by the system wide
 profiler. Default value is ffffffff (all cpus).
 profiler. Default value is ffffffff (all cpus).
 
 
@@ -965,7 +968,7 @@ your system and how much traffic was routed over those devices:
   ...] 1375103    17405    0    0    0     0       0          0 
   ...] 1375103    17405    0    0    0     0       0          0 
   ...] 1703981     5535    0    0    0     3       0          0 
   ...] 1703981     5535    0    0    0     3       0          0 
 
 
-In addition, each Channel Bond interface has it's own directory.  For
+In addition, each Channel Bond interface has its own directory.  For
 example, the bond0 device will have a directory called /proc/net/bond0/.
 example, the bond0 device will have a directory called /proc/net/bond0/.
 It will contain information that is specific to that bond, such as the
 It will contain information that is specific to that bond, such as the
 current slaves of the bond, the link status of the slaves, and how
 current slaves of the bond, the link status of the slaves, and how
@@ -1362,7 +1365,7 @@ been accounted as having caused 1MB of write.
 In other words: The number of bytes which this process caused to not happen,
 In other words: The number of bytes which this process caused to not happen,
 by truncating pagecache. A task can cause "negative" IO too. If this task
 by truncating pagecache. A task can cause "negative" IO too. If this task
 truncates some dirty pagecache, some IO which another task has been accounted
 truncates some dirty pagecache, some IO which another task has been accounted
-for (in it's write_bytes) will not be happening. We _could_ just subtract that
+for (in its write_bytes) will not be happening. We _could_ just subtract that
 from the truncating task's write_bytes, but there is information loss in doing
 from the truncating task's write_bytes, but there is information loss in doing
 that.
 that.
 
 

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/filesystems/smbfs.txt

@@ -3,6 +3,6 @@ protocol used by Windows for Workgroups, Windows 95 and Windows NT.
 Smbfs was inspired by Samba, the program written by Andrew Tridgell
 Smbfs was inspired by Samba, the program written by Andrew Tridgell
 that turns any Unix host into a file server for DOS or Windows clients.
 that turns any Unix host into a file server for DOS or Windows clients.
 
 
-Smbfs is a SMB client, but uses parts of samba for it's operation. For
+Smbfs is a SMB client, but uses parts of samba for its operation. For
 more info on samba, including documentation, please go to
 more info on samba, including documentation, please go to
 http://www.samba.org/ and then on to your nearest mirror.
 http://www.samba.org/ and then on to your nearest mirror.

+ 42 - 0
Documentation/filesystems/sysfs-tagging.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+Sysfs tagging
+-------------
+
+(Taken almost verbatim from Eric Biederman's netns tagging patch
+commit msg)
+
+The problem.  Network devices show up in sysfs and with the network
+namespace active multiple devices with the same name can show up in
+the same directory, ouch!
+
+To avoid that problem and allow existing applications in network
+namespaces to see the same interface that is currently presented in
+sysfs, sysfs now has tagging directory support.
+
+By using the network namespace pointers as tags to separate out the
+the sysfs directory entries we ensure that we don't have conflicts
+in the directories and applications only see a limited set of
+the network devices.
+
+Each sysfs directory entry may be tagged with zero or one
+namespaces.  A sysfs_dirent is augmented with a void *s_ns.  If a
+directory entry is tagged, then sysfs_dirent->s_flags will have a
+flag between KOBJ_NS_TYPE_NONE and KOBJ_NS_TYPES, and s_ns will
+point to the namespace to which it belongs.
+
+Each sysfs superblock's sysfs_super_info contains an array void
+*ns[KOBJ_NS_TYPES].  When a a task in a tagging namespace
+kobj_nstype first mounts sysfs, a new superblock is created.  It
+will be differentiated from other sysfs mounts by having its
+s_fs_info->ns[kobj_nstype] set to the new namespace.  Note that
+through bind mounting and mounts propagation, a task can easily view
+the contents of other namespaces' sysfs mounts.  Therefore, when a
+namespace exits, it will call kobj_ns_exit() to invalidate any
+sysfs_dirent->s_ns pointers pointing to it.
+
+Users of this interface:
+- define a type in the kobj_ns_type enumeration.
+- call kobj_ns_type_register() with its kobj_ns_type_operations which has
+  - current_ns() which returns current's namespace
+  - netlink_ns() which returns a socket's namespace
+  - initial_ns() which returns the initial namesapce
+- call kobj_ns_exit() when an individual tag is no longer valid

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt

@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ structure (this is the kernel-side implementation of file
 descriptors). The freshly allocated file structure is initialized with
 descriptors). The freshly allocated file structure is initialized with
 a pointer to the dentry and a set of file operation member functions.
 a pointer to the dentry and a set of file operation member functions.
 These are taken from the inode data. The open() file method is then
 These are taken from the inode data. The open() file method is then
-called so the specific filesystem implementation can do it's work. You
+called so the specific filesystem implementation can do its work. You
 can see that this is another switch performed by the VFS. The file
 can see that this is another switch performed by the VFS. The file
 structure is placed into the file descriptor table for the process.
 structure is placed into the file descriptor table for the process.
 
 

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/hwmon/lm85

@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ temperature configuration points:
 
 
 There are three PWM outputs. The LM85 datasheet suggests that the
 There are three PWM outputs. The LM85 datasheet suggests that the
 pwm3 output control both fan3 and fan4. Each PWM can be individually
 pwm3 output control both fan3 and fan4. Each PWM can be individually
-configured and assigned to a zone for it's control value. Each PWM can be
+configured and assigned to a zone for its control value. Each PWM can be
 configured individually according to the following options.
 configured individually according to the following options.
 
 
 * pwm#_auto_pwm_min - this specifies the PWM value for temp#_auto_temp_off
 * pwm#_auto_pwm_min - this specifies the PWM value for temp#_auto_temp_off

+ 7 - 1
Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801

@@ -27,7 +27,13 @@ Authors:
 Module Parameters
 Module Parameters
 -----------------
 -----------------
 
 
-None.
+* disable_features (bit vector)
+Disable selected features normally supported by the device. This makes it
+possible to work around possible driver or hardware bugs if the feature in
+question doesn't work as intended for whatever reason. Bit values:
+  1  disable SMBus PEC
+  2  disable the block buffer
+  8  disable the I2C block read functionality
 
 
 
 
 Description
 Description

+ 5 - 0
Documentation/i2c/writing-clients

@@ -74,6 +74,11 @@ structure at all.  You should use this to keep device-specific data.
 	/* retrieve the value */
 	/* retrieve the value */
 	void *i2c_get_clientdata(const struct i2c_client *client);
 	void *i2c_get_clientdata(const struct i2c_client *client);
 
 
+Note that starting with kernel 2.6.34, you don't have to set the `data' field
+to NULL in remove() or if probe() failed anymore. The i2c-core does this
+automatically on these occasions. Those are also the only times the core will
+touch this field.
+
 
 
 Accessing the client
 Accessing the client
 ====================
 ====================

+ 4 - 4
Documentation/input/elantech.txt

@@ -333,14 +333,14 @@ byte 0:
 byte 1:
 byte 1:
 
 
    bit   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0
    bit   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0
-        x15 x14 x13 x12 x11 x10 x9  x8
+         .   .   .   .   .  x10 x9  x8
 
 
 byte 2:
 byte 2:
 
 
    bit   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0
    bit   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0
         x7  x6  x5  x4  x4  x2  x1  x0
         x7  x6  x5  x4  x4  x2  x1  x0
 
 
-         x15..x0 = absolute x value (horizontal)
+         x10..x0 = absolute x value (horizontal)
 
 
 byte 3:
 byte 3:
 
 
@@ -350,14 +350,14 @@ byte 3:
 byte 4:
 byte 4:
 
 
    bit   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0
    bit   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0
-        y15 y14 y13 y12 y11 y10 y8  y8
+         .   .   .   .   .   .  y9  y8
 
 
 byte 5:
 byte 5:
 
 
    bit   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0
    bit   7   6   5   4   3   2   1   0
         y7  y6  y5  y4  y3  y2  y1  y0
         y7  y6  y5  y4  y3  y2  y1  y0
 
 
-         y15..y0 = absolute y value (vertical)
+         y9..y0 = absolute y value (vertical)
 
 
 
 
 4.2.2 Two finger touch
 4.2.2 Two finger touch

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/input/joystick.txt

@@ -402,7 +402,7 @@ for the port of the SoundFusion is supported by the cs461x.c module.
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
   The Live! has a special PCI gameport, which, although it doesn't provide
   The Live! has a special PCI gameport, which, although it doesn't provide
 any "Enhanced" stuff like 4DWave and friends, is quite a bit faster than
 any "Enhanced" stuff like 4DWave and friends, is quite a bit faster than
-it's ISA counterparts. It also requires special support, hence the
+its ISA counterparts. It also requires special support, hence the
 emu10k1-gp.c module for it instead of the normal ns558.c one.
 emu10k1-gp.c module for it instead of the normal ns558.c one.
 
 
 3.15 SoundBlaster 64 and 128 - ES1370 and ES1371, ESS Solo1 and S3 SonicVibes
 3.15 SoundBlaster 64 and 128 - ES1370 and ES1371, ESS Solo1 and S3 SonicVibes

+ 10 - 8
Documentation/intel_txt.txt

@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ o  Tboot then applies an (optional) user-defined launch policy to
 o  Tboot adjusts the e820 table provided by the bootloader to reserve
 o  Tboot adjusts the e820 table provided by the bootloader to reserve
    its own location in memory as well as to reserve certain other
    its own location in memory as well as to reserve certain other
    TXT-related regions.
    TXT-related regions.
-o  As part of it's launch, tboot DMA protects all of RAM (using the
+o  As part of its launch, tboot DMA protects all of RAM (using the
    VT-d PMRs).  Thus, the kernel must be booted with 'intel_iommu=on'
    VT-d PMRs).  Thus, the kernel must be booted with 'intel_iommu=on'
    in order to remove this blanket protection and use VT-d's
    in order to remove this blanket protection and use VT-d's
    page-level protection.
    page-level protection.
@@ -161,13 +161,15 @@ o  In order to put a system into any of the sleep states after a TXT
       has been restored, it will restore the TPM PCRs and then
       has been restored, it will restore the TPM PCRs and then
       transfer control back to the kernel's S3 resume vector.
       transfer control back to the kernel's S3 resume vector.
       In order to preserve system integrity across S3, the kernel
       In order to preserve system integrity across S3, the kernel
-      provides tboot with a set of memory ranges (kernel
-      code/data/bss, S3 resume code, and AP trampoline) that tboot
-      will calculate a MAC (message authentication code) over and then
-      seal with the TPM.  On resume and once the measured environment
-      has been re-established, tboot will re-calculate the MAC and
-      verify it against the sealed value.  Tboot's policy determines
-      what happens if the verification fails.
+      provides tboot with a set of memory ranges (RAM and RESERVED_KERN
+      in the e820 table, but not any memory that BIOS might alter over
+      the S3 transition) that tboot will calculate a MAC (message
+      authentication code) over and then seal with the TPM. On resume
+      and once the measured environment has been re-established, tboot
+      will re-calculate the MAC and verify it against the sealed value.
+      Tboot's policy determines what happens if the verification fails.
+      Note that the c/s 194 of tboot which has the new MAC code supports
+      this.
 
 
 That's pretty much it for TXT support.
 That's pretty much it for TXT support.
 
 

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt

@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Expressions are listed in decreasing order of precedence.
 (7) Returns the result of max(/expr/, /expr/).
 (7) Returns the result of max(/expr/, /expr/).
 
 
 An expression can have a value of 'n', 'm' or 'y' (or 0, 1, 2
 An expression can have a value of 'n', 'm' or 'y' (or 0, 1, 2
-respectively for calculations). A menu entry becomes visible when it's
+respectively for calculations). A menu entry becomes visible when its
 expression evaluates to 'm' or 'y'.
 expression evaluates to 'm' or 'y'.
 
 
 There are two types of symbols: constant and non-constant symbols.
 There are two types of symbols: constant and non-constant symbols.

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/kbuild/kconfig.txt

@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ Environment variables for 'silentoldconfig'
 KCONFIG_NOSILENTUPDATE
 KCONFIG_NOSILENTUPDATE
 --------------------------------------------------
 --------------------------------------------------
 If this variable has a non-blank value, it prevents silent kernel
 If this variable has a non-blank value, it prevents silent kernel
-config udpates (requires explicit updates).
+config updates (requires explicit updates).
 
 
 KCONFIG_AUTOCONFIG
 KCONFIG_AUTOCONFIG
 --------------------------------------------------
 --------------------------------------------------

+ 5 - 5
Documentation/kernel-docs.txt

@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@
        Author: Ingo Molnar, Gadi Oxman and Miguel de Icaza.
        Author: Ingo Molnar, Gadi Oxman and Miguel de Icaza.
        URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=2391
        URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=2391
        Keywords: RAID, MD driver.
        Keywords: RAID, MD driver.
-       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is it's
+       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is its
        abstract: "A description of the implementation of the RAID-1,
        abstract: "A description of the implementation of the RAID-1,
        RAID-4 and RAID-5 personalities of the MD device driver in the
        RAID-4 and RAID-5 personalities of the MD device driver in the
        Linux kernel, providing users with high performance and reliable,
        Linux kernel, providing users with high performance and reliable,
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@
        URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=1219
        URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=1219
        Keywords: device driver, module, loading/unloading modules,
        Keywords: device driver, module, loading/unloading modules,
        allocating resources.
        allocating resources.
-       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is it's
+       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is its
        abstract: "This is the first of a series of four articles
        abstract: "This is the first of a series of four articles
        co-authored by Alessandro Rubini and Georg Zezchwitz which present
        co-authored by Alessandro Rubini and Georg Zezchwitz which present
        a practical approach to writing Linux device drivers as kernel
        a practical approach to writing Linux device drivers as kernel
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@
        Keywords: character driver, init_module, clean_up module,
        Keywords: character driver, init_module, clean_up module,
        autodetection, mayor number, minor number, file operations,
        autodetection, mayor number, minor number, file operations,
        open(), close().
        open(), close().
-       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is it's
+       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is its
        abstract: "This article, the second of four, introduces part of
        abstract: "This article, the second of four, introduces part of
        the actual code to create custom module implementing a character
        the actual code to create custom module implementing a character
        device driver. It describes the code for module initialization and
        device driver. It describes the code for module initialization and
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@
        URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=1221
        URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=1221
        Keywords: read(), write(), select(), ioctl(), blocking/non
        Keywords: read(), write(), select(), ioctl(), blocking/non
        blocking mode, interrupt handler.
        blocking mode, interrupt handler.
-       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is it's
+       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is its
        abstract: "This article, the third of four on writing character
        abstract: "This article, the third of four on writing character
        device drivers, introduces concepts of reading, writing, and using
        device drivers, introduces concepts of reading, writing, and using
        ioctl-calls".
        ioctl-calls".
@@ -161,7 +161,7 @@
        Author: Alessandro Rubini and Georg v. Zezschwitz.
        Author: Alessandro Rubini and Georg v. Zezschwitz.
        URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=1222
        URL: http://www.linuxjournal.com/article.php?sid=1222
        Keywords: interrupts, irqs, DMA, bottom halves, task queues.
        Keywords: interrupts, irqs, DMA, bottom halves, task queues.
-       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is it's
+       Description: Linux Journal Kernel Korner article. Here is its
        abstract: "This is the fourth in a series of articles about
        abstract: "This is the fourth in a series of articles about
        writing character device drivers as loadable kernel modules. This
        writing character device drivers as loadable kernel modules. This
        month, we further investigate the field of interrupt handling.
        month, we further investigate the field of interrupt handling.

+ 46 - 6
Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt

@@ -58,6 +58,7 @@ parameter is applicable:
 	ISAPNP	ISA PnP code is enabled.
 	ISAPNP	ISA PnP code is enabled.
 	ISDN	Appropriate ISDN support is enabled.
 	ISDN	Appropriate ISDN support is enabled.
 	JOY	Appropriate joystick support is enabled.
 	JOY	Appropriate joystick support is enabled.
+	KGDB	Kernel debugger support is enabled.
 	KVM	Kernel Virtual Machine support is enabled.
 	KVM	Kernel Virtual Machine support is enabled.
 	LIBATA  Libata driver is enabled
 	LIBATA  Libata driver is enabled
 	LP	Printer support is enabled.
 	LP	Printer support is enabled.
@@ -99,6 +100,7 @@ parameter is applicable:
 	SWSUSP	Software suspend (hibernation) is enabled.
 	SWSUSP	Software suspend (hibernation) is enabled.
 	SUSPEND	System suspend states are enabled.
 	SUSPEND	System suspend states are enabled.
 	FTRACE	Function tracing enabled.
 	FTRACE	Function tracing enabled.
+	TPM	TPM drivers are enabled.
 	TS	Appropriate touchscreen support is enabled.
 	TS	Appropriate touchscreen support is enabled.
 	UMS	USB Mass Storage support is enabled.
 	UMS	USB Mass Storage support is enabled.
 	USB	USB support is enabled.
 	USB	USB support is enabled.
@@ -151,6 +153,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			strict -- Be less tolerant of platforms that are not
 			strict -- Be less tolerant of platforms that are not
 				strictly ACPI specification compliant.
 				strictly ACPI specification compliant.
 			rsdt -- prefer RSDT over (default) XSDT
 			rsdt -- prefer RSDT over (default) XSDT
+			copy_dsdt -- copy DSDT to memory
 
 
 			See also Documentation/power/pm.txt, pci=noacpi
 			See also Documentation/power/pm.txt, pci=noacpi
 
 
@@ -324,6 +327,8 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 				    they are unmapped. Otherwise they are
 				    they are unmapped. Otherwise they are
 				    flushed before they will be reused, which
 				    flushed before they will be reused, which
 				    is a lot of faster
 				    is a lot of faster
+			off	  - do not initialize any AMD IOMMU found in
+				    the system
 
 
 	amijoy.map=	[HW,JOY] Amiga joystick support
 	amijoy.map=	[HW,JOY] Amiga joystick support
 			Map of devices attached to JOY0DAT and JOY1DAT
 			Map of devices attached to JOY0DAT and JOY1DAT
@@ -708,6 +713,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			The VGA output is eventually overwritten by the real
 			The VGA output is eventually overwritten by the real
 			console.
 			console.
 
 
+	ekgdboc=	[X86,KGDB] Allow early kernel console debugging
+			ekgdboc=kbd
+
+			This is desgined to be used in conjunction with
+			the boot argument: earlyprintk=vga
+
 	eata=		[HW,SCSI]
 	eata=		[HW,SCSI]
 
 
 	edd=		[EDD]
 	edd=		[EDD]
@@ -784,8 +795,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			as early as possible in order to facilitate early
 			as early as possible in order to facilitate early
 			boot debugging.
 			boot debugging.
 
 
-	ftrace_dump_on_oops
+	ftrace_dump_on_oops[=orig_cpu]
 			[FTRACE] will dump the trace buffers on oops.
 			[FTRACE] will dump the trace buffers on oops.
+			If no parameter is passed, ftrace will dump
+			buffers of all CPUs, but if you pass orig_cpu, it will
+			dump only the buffer of the CPU that triggered the
+			oops.
 
 
 	ftrace_filter=[function-list]
 	ftrace_filter=[function-list]
 			[FTRACE] Limit the functions traced by the function
 			[FTRACE] Limit the functions traced by the function
@@ -1112,10 +1127,26 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			use the HighMem zone if it exists, and the Normal
 			use the HighMem zone if it exists, and the Normal
 			zone if it does not.
 			zone if it does not.
 
 
-	kgdboc=		[HW] kgdb over consoles.
-			Requires a tty driver that supports console polling.
-			(only serial supported for now)
-			Format: <serial_device>[,baud]
+	kgdbdbgp=	[KGDB,HW] kgdb over EHCI usb debug port.
+			Format: <Controller#>[,poll interval]
+			The controller # is the number of the ehci usb debug
+			port as it is probed via PCI.  The poll interval is
+			optional and is the number seconds in between
+			each poll cycle to the debug port in case you need
+			the functionality for interrupting the kernel with
+			gdb or control-c on the dbgp connection.  When
+			not using this parameter you use sysrq-g to break into
+			the kernel debugger.
+
+	kgdboc=		[KGDB,HW] kgdb over consoles.
+			Requires a tty driver that supports console polling,
+			or a supported polling keyboard driver (non-usb).
+			Serial only format: <serial_device>[,baud]
+			keyboard only format: kbd
+			keyboard and serial format: kbd,<serial_device>[,baud]
+
+	kgdbwait	[KGDB] Stop kernel execution and enter the
+			kernel debugger at the earliest opportunity.
 
 
 	kmac=		[MIPS] korina ethernet MAC address.
 	kmac=		[MIPS] korina ethernet MAC address.
 			Configure the RouterBoard 532 series on-chip
 			Configure the RouterBoard 532 series on-chip
@@ -1194,7 +1225,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
 
 	libata.force=	[LIBATA] Force configurations.  The format is comma
 	libata.force=	[LIBATA] Force configurations.  The format is comma
 			separated list of "[ID:]VAL" where ID is
 			separated list of "[ID:]VAL" where ID is
-			PORT[:DEVICE].  PORT and DEVICE are decimal numbers
+			PORT[.DEVICE].  PORT and DEVICE are decimal numbers
 			matching port, link or device.  Basically, it matches
 			matching port, link or device.  Basically, it matches
 			the ATA ID string printed on console by libata.  If
 			the ATA ID string printed on console by libata.  If
 			the whole ID part is omitted, the last PORT and DEVICE
 			the whole ID part is omitted, the last PORT and DEVICE
@@ -2610,6 +2641,15 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 
 
 	tp720=		[HW,PS2]
 	tp720=		[HW,PS2]
 
 
+	tpm_suspend_pcr=[HW,TPM]
+			Format: integer pcr id
+			Specify that at suspend time, the tpm driver
+			should extend the specified pcr with zeros,
+			as a workaround for some chips which fail to
+			flush the last written pcr on TPM_SaveState.
+			This will guarantee that all the other pcrs
+			are saved.
+
 	trace_buf_size=nn[KMG]
 	trace_buf_size=nn[KMG]
 			[FTRACE] will set tracing buffer size.
 			[FTRACE] will set tracing buffer size.
 
 

+ 3 - 9
Documentation/kprobes.txt

@@ -165,8 +165,8 @@ the user entry_handler invocation is also skipped.
 
 
 1.4 How Does Jump Optimization Work?
 1.4 How Does Jump Optimization Work?
 
 
-If you configured your kernel with CONFIG_OPTPROBES=y (currently
-this option is supported on x86/x86-64, non-preemptive kernel) and
+If your kernel is built with CONFIG_OPTPROBES=y (currently this flag
+is automatically set 'y' on x86/x86-64, non-preemptive kernel) and
 the "debug.kprobes_optimization" kernel parameter is set to 1 (see
 the "debug.kprobes_optimization" kernel parameter is set to 1 (see
 sysctl(8)), Kprobes tries to reduce probe-hit overhead by using a jump
 sysctl(8)), Kprobes tries to reduce probe-hit overhead by using a jump
 instruction instead of a breakpoint instruction at each probepoint.
 instruction instead of a breakpoint instruction at each probepoint.
@@ -271,8 +271,6 @@ tweak the kernel's execution path, you need to suppress optimization,
 using one of the following techniques:
 using one of the following techniques:
 - Specify an empty function for the kprobe's post_handler or break_handler.
 - Specify an empty function for the kprobe's post_handler or break_handler.
  or
  or
-- Config CONFIG_OPTPROBES=n.
- or
 - Execute 'sysctl -w debug.kprobes_optimization=n'
 - Execute 'sysctl -w debug.kprobes_optimization=n'
 
 
 2. Architectures Supported
 2. Architectures Supported
@@ -307,10 +305,6 @@ it useful to "Compile the kernel with debug info" (CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO),
 so you can use "objdump -d -l vmlinux" to see the source-to-object
 so you can use "objdump -d -l vmlinux" to see the source-to-object
 code mapping.
 code mapping.
 
 
-If you want to reduce probing overhead, set "Kprobes jump optimization
-support" (CONFIG_OPTPROBES) to "y". You can find this option under the
-"Kprobes" line.
-
 4. API Reference
 4. API Reference
 
 
 The Kprobes API includes a "register" function and an "unregister"
 The Kprobes API includes a "register" function and an "unregister"
@@ -332,7 +326,7 @@ occurs during execution of kp->pre_handler or kp->post_handler,
 or during single-stepping of the probed instruction, Kprobes calls
 or during single-stepping of the probed instruction, Kprobes calls
 kp->fault_handler.  Any or all handlers can be NULL. If kp->flags
 kp->fault_handler.  Any or all handlers can be NULL. If kp->flags
 is set KPROBE_FLAG_DISABLED, that kp will be registered but disabled,
 is set KPROBE_FLAG_DISABLED, that kp will be registered but disabled,
-so, it's handlers aren't hit until calling enable_kprobe(kp).
+so, its handlers aren't hit until calling enable_kprobe(kp).
 
 
 NOTE:
 NOTE:
 1. With the introduction of the "symbol_name" field to struct kprobe,
 1. With the introduction of the "symbol_name" field to struct kprobe,

+ 206 - 2
Documentation/kvm/api.txt

@@ -656,6 +656,7 @@ struct kvm_clock_data {
 4.29 KVM_GET_VCPU_EVENTS
 4.29 KVM_GET_VCPU_EVENTS
 
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS
 Capability: KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS
+Extended by: KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW
 Architectures: x86
 Architectures: x86
 Type: vm ioctl
 Type: vm ioctl
 Parameters: struct kvm_vcpu_event (out)
 Parameters: struct kvm_vcpu_event (out)
@@ -676,7 +677,7 @@ struct kvm_vcpu_events {
 		__u8 injected;
 		__u8 injected;
 		__u8 nr;
 		__u8 nr;
 		__u8 soft;
 		__u8 soft;
-		__u8 pad;
+		__u8 shadow;
 	} interrupt;
 	} interrupt;
 	struct {
 	struct {
 		__u8 injected;
 		__u8 injected;
@@ -688,9 +689,13 @@ struct kvm_vcpu_events {
 	__u32 flags;
 	__u32 flags;
 };
 };
 
 
+KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_SHADOW may be set in the flags field to signal that
+interrupt.shadow contains a valid state. Otherwise, this field is undefined.
+
 4.30 KVM_SET_VCPU_EVENTS
 4.30 KVM_SET_VCPU_EVENTS
 
 
 Capability: KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS
 Capability: KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS
+Extended by: KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW
 Architectures: x86
 Architectures: x86
 Type: vm ioctl
 Type: vm ioctl
 Parameters: struct kvm_vcpu_event (in)
 Parameters: struct kvm_vcpu_event (in)
@@ -709,6 +714,183 @@ current in-kernel state. The bits are:
 KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_NMI_PENDING - transfer nmi.pending to the kernel
 KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_NMI_PENDING - transfer nmi.pending to the kernel
 KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_SIPI_VECTOR - transfer sipi_vector
 KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_SIPI_VECTOR - transfer sipi_vector
 
 
+If KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW is available, KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_SHADOW can be set in
+the flags field to signal that interrupt.shadow contains a valid state and
+shall be written into the VCPU.
+
+4.32 KVM_GET_DEBUGREGS
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_DEBUGREGS
+Architectures: x86
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_debugregs (out)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+Reads debug registers from the vcpu.
+
+struct kvm_debugregs {
+	__u64 db[4];
+	__u64 dr6;
+	__u64 dr7;
+	__u64 flags;
+	__u64 reserved[9];
+};
+
+4.33 KVM_SET_DEBUGREGS
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_DEBUGREGS
+Architectures: x86
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_debugregs (in)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+Writes debug registers into the vcpu.
+
+See KVM_GET_DEBUGREGS for the data structure. The flags field is unused
+yet and must be cleared on entry.
+
+4.34 KVM_SET_USER_MEMORY_REGION
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_USER_MEM
+Architectures: all
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_userspace_memory_region (in)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+struct kvm_userspace_memory_region {
+	__u32 slot;
+	__u32 flags;
+	__u64 guest_phys_addr;
+	__u64 memory_size; /* bytes */
+	__u64 userspace_addr; /* start of the userspace allocated memory */
+};
+
+/* for kvm_memory_region::flags */
+#define KVM_MEM_LOG_DIRTY_PAGES  1UL
+
+This ioctl allows the user to create or modify a guest physical memory
+slot.  When changing an existing slot, it may be moved in the guest
+physical memory space, or its flags may be modified.  It may not be
+resized.  Slots may not overlap in guest physical address space.
+
+Memory for the region is taken starting at the address denoted by the
+field userspace_addr, which must point at user addressable memory for
+the entire memory slot size.  Any object may back this memory, including
+anonymous memory, ordinary files, and hugetlbfs.
+
+It is recommended that the lower 21 bits of guest_phys_addr and userspace_addr
+be identical.  This allows large pages in the guest to be backed by large
+pages in the host.
+
+The flags field supports just one flag, KVM_MEM_LOG_DIRTY_PAGES, which
+instructs kvm to keep track of writes to memory within the slot.  See
+the KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG ioctl.
+
+When the KVM_CAP_SYNC_MMU capability, changes in the backing of the memory
+region are automatically reflected into the guest.  For example, an mmap()
+that affects the region will be made visible immediately.  Another example
+is madvise(MADV_DROP).
+
+It is recommended to use this API instead of the KVM_SET_MEMORY_REGION ioctl.
+The KVM_SET_MEMORY_REGION does not allow fine grained control over memory
+allocation and is deprecated.
+
+4.35 KVM_SET_TSS_ADDR
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_SET_TSS_ADDR
+Architectures: x86
+Type: vm ioctl
+Parameters: unsigned long tss_address (in)
+Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
+
+This ioctl defines the physical address of a three-page region in the guest
+physical address space.  The region must be within the first 4GB of the
+guest physical address space and must not conflict with any memory slot
+or any mmio address.  The guest may malfunction if it accesses this memory
+region.
+
+This ioctl is required on Intel-based hosts.  This is needed on Intel hardware
+because of a quirk in the virtualization implementation (see the internals
+documentation when it pops into existence).
+
+4.36 KVM_ENABLE_CAP
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_ENABLE_CAP
+Architectures: ppc
+Type: vcpu ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_enable_cap (in)
+Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error
+
++Not all extensions are enabled by default. Using this ioctl the application
+can enable an extension, making it available to the guest.
+
+On systems that do not support this ioctl, it always fails. On systems that
+do support it, it only works for extensions that are supported for enablement.
+
+To check if a capability can be enabled, the KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION ioctl should
+be used.
+
+struct kvm_enable_cap {
+       /* in */
+       __u32 cap;
+
+The capability that is supposed to get enabled.
+
+       __u32 flags;
+
+A bitfield indicating future enhancements. Has to be 0 for now.
+
+       __u64 args[4];
+
+Arguments for enabling a feature. If a feature needs initial values to
+function properly, this is the place to put them.
+
+       __u8  pad[64];
+};
+
+4.37 KVM_GET_MP_STATE
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_MP_STATE
+Architectures: x86, ia64
+Type: vcpu ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_mp_state (out)
+Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error
+
+struct kvm_mp_state {
+	__u32 mp_state;
+};
+
+Returns the vcpu's current "multiprocessing state" (though also valid on
+uniprocessor guests).
+
+Possible values are:
+
+ - KVM_MP_STATE_RUNNABLE:        the vcpu is currently running
+ - KVM_MP_STATE_UNINITIALIZED:   the vcpu is an application processor (AP)
+                                 which has not yet received an INIT signal
+ - KVM_MP_STATE_INIT_RECEIVED:   the vcpu has received an INIT signal, and is
+                                 now ready for a SIPI
+ - KVM_MP_STATE_HALTED:          the vcpu has executed a HLT instruction and
+                                 is waiting for an interrupt
+ - KVM_MP_STATE_SIPI_RECEIVED:   the vcpu has just received a SIPI (vector
+                                 accesible via KVM_GET_VCPU_EVENTS)
+
+This ioctl is only useful after KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP.  Without an in-kernel
+irqchip, the multiprocessing state must be maintained by userspace.
+
+4.38 KVM_SET_MP_STATE
+
+Capability: KVM_CAP_MP_STATE
+Architectures: x86, ia64
+Type: vcpu ioctl
+Parameters: struct kvm_mp_state (in)
+Returns: 0 on success; -1 on error
+
+Sets the vcpu's current "multiprocessing state"; see KVM_GET_MP_STATE for
+arguments.
+
+This ioctl is only useful after KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP.  Without an in-kernel
+irqchip, the multiprocessing state must be maintained by userspace.
 
 
 5. The kvm_run structure
 5. The kvm_run structure
 
 
@@ -820,6 +1002,13 @@ executed a memory-mapped I/O instruction which could not be satisfied
 by kvm.  The 'data' member contains the written data if 'is_write' is
 by kvm.  The 'data' member contains the written data if 'is_write' is
 true, and should be filled by application code otherwise.
 true, and should be filled by application code otherwise.
 
 
+NOTE: For KVM_EXIT_IO, KVM_EXIT_MMIO and KVM_EXIT_OSI, the corresponding
+operations are complete (and guest state is consistent) only after userspace
+has re-entered the kernel with KVM_RUN.  The kernel side will first finish
+incomplete operations and then check for pending signals.  Userspace
+can re-enter the guest with an unmasked signal pending to complete
+pending operations.
+
 		/* KVM_EXIT_HYPERCALL */
 		/* KVM_EXIT_HYPERCALL */
 		struct {
 		struct {
 			__u64 nr;
 			__u64 nr;
@@ -829,7 +1018,9 @@ true, and should be filled by application code otherwise.
 			__u32 pad;
 			__u32 pad;
 		} hypercall;
 		} hypercall;
 
 
-Unused.
+Unused.  This was once used for 'hypercall to userspace'.  To implement
+such functionality, use KVM_EXIT_IO (x86) or KVM_EXIT_MMIO (all except s390).
+Note KVM_EXIT_IO is significantly faster than KVM_EXIT_MMIO.
 
 
 		/* KVM_EXIT_TPR_ACCESS */
 		/* KVM_EXIT_TPR_ACCESS */
 		struct {
 		struct {
@@ -870,6 +1061,19 @@ s390 specific.
 
 
 powerpc specific.
 powerpc specific.
 
 
+		/* KVM_EXIT_OSI */
+		struct {
+			__u64 gprs[32];
+		} osi;
+
+MOL uses a special hypercall interface it calls 'OSI'. To enable it, we catch
+hypercalls and exit with this exit struct that contains all the guest gprs.
+
+If exit_reason is KVM_EXIT_OSI, then the vcpu has triggered such a hypercall.
+Userspace can now handle the hypercall and when it's done modify the gprs as
+necessary. Upon guest entry all guest GPRs will then be replaced by the values
+in this struct.
+
 		/* Fix the size of the union. */
 		/* Fix the size of the union. */
 		char padding[256];
 		char padding[256];
 	};
 	};

+ 42 - 0
Documentation/kvm/cpuid.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+KVM CPUID bits
+Glauber Costa <glommer@redhat.com>, Red Hat Inc, 2010
+=====================================================
+
+A guest running on a kvm host, can check some of its features using
+cpuid. This is not always guaranteed to work, since userspace can
+mask-out some, or even all KVM-related cpuid features before launching
+a guest.
+
+KVM cpuid functions are:
+
+function: KVM_CPUID_SIGNATURE (0x40000000)
+returns : eax = 0,
+          ebx = 0x4b4d564b,
+          ecx = 0x564b4d56,
+          edx = 0x4d.
+Note that this value in ebx, ecx and edx corresponds to the string "KVMKVMKVM".
+This function queries the presence of KVM cpuid leafs.
+
+
+function: define KVM_CPUID_FEATURES (0x40000001)
+returns : ebx, ecx, edx = 0
+          eax = and OR'ed group of (1 << flag), where each flags is:
+
+
+flag                               || value || meaning
+=============================================================================
+KVM_FEATURE_CLOCKSOURCE            ||     0 || kvmclock available at msrs
+                                   ||       || 0x11 and 0x12.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+KVM_FEATURE_NOP_IO_DELAY           ||     1 || not necessary to perform delays
+                                   ||       || on PIO operations.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+KVM_FEATURE_MMU_OP                 ||     2 || deprecated.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+KVM_FEATURE_CLOCKSOURCE2           ||     3 || kvmclock available at msrs
+                                   ||       || 0x4b564d00 and 0x4b564d01
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+KVM_FEATURE_CLOCKSOURCE_STABLE_BIT ||    24 || host will warn if no guest-side
+                                   ||       || per-cpu warps are expected in
+                                   ||       || kvmclock.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------

+ 304 - 0
Documentation/kvm/mmu.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,304 @@
+The x86 kvm shadow mmu
+======================
+
+The mmu (in arch/x86/kvm, files mmu.[ch] and paging_tmpl.h) is responsible
+for presenting a standard x86 mmu to the guest, while translating guest
+physical addresses to host physical addresses.
+
+The mmu code attempts to satisfy the following requirements:
+
+- correctness: the guest should not be able to determine that it is running
+               on an emulated mmu except for timing (we attempt to comply
+               with the specification, not emulate the characteristics of
+               a particular implementation such as tlb size)
+- security:    the guest must not be able to touch host memory not assigned
+               to it
+- performance: minimize the performance penalty imposed by the mmu
+- scaling:     need to scale to large memory and large vcpu guests
+- hardware:    support the full range of x86 virtualization hardware
+- integration: Linux memory management code must be in control of guest memory
+               so that swapping, page migration, page merging, transparent
+               hugepages, and similar features work without change
+- dirty tracking: report writes to guest memory to enable live migration
+               and framebuffer-based displays
+- footprint:   keep the amount of pinned kernel memory low (most memory
+               should be shrinkable)
+- reliablity:  avoid multipage or GFP_ATOMIC allocations
+
+Acronyms
+========
+
+pfn   host page frame number
+hpa   host physical address
+hva   host virtual address
+gfn   guest frame number
+gpa   guest physical address
+gva   guest virtual address
+ngpa  nested guest physical address
+ngva  nested guest virtual address
+pte   page table entry (used also to refer generically to paging structure
+      entries)
+gpte  guest pte (referring to gfns)
+spte  shadow pte (referring to pfns)
+tdp   two dimensional paging (vendor neutral term for NPT and EPT)
+
+Virtual and real hardware supported
+===================================
+
+The mmu supports first-generation mmu hardware, which allows an atomic switch
+of the current paging mode and cr3 during guest entry, as well as
+two-dimensional paging (AMD's NPT and Intel's EPT).  The emulated hardware
+it exposes is the traditional 2/3/4 level x86 mmu, with support for global
+pages, pae, pse, pse36, cr0.wp, and 1GB pages.  Work is in progress to support
+exposing NPT capable hardware on NPT capable hosts.
+
+Translation
+===========
+
+The primary job of the mmu is to program the processor's mmu to translate
+addresses for the guest.  Different translations are required at different
+times:
+
+- when guest paging is disabled, we translate guest physical addresses to
+  host physical addresses (gpa->hpa)
+- when guest paging is enabled, we translate guest virtual addresses, to
+  guest physical addresses, to host physical addresses (gva->gpa->hpa)
+- when the guest launches a guest of its own, we translate nested guest
+  virtual addresses, to nested guest physical addresses, to guest physical
+  addresses, to host physical addresses (ngva->ngpa->gpa->hpa)
+
+The primary challenge is to encode between 1 and 3 translations into hardware
+that support only 1 (traditional) and 2 (tdp) translations.  When the
+number of required translations matches the hardware, the mmu operates in
+direct mode; otherwise it operates in shadow mode (see below).
+
+Memory
+======
+
+Guest memory (gpa) is part of the user address space of the process that is
+using kvm.  Userspace defines the translation between guest addresses and user
+addresses (gpa->hva); note that two gpas may alias to the same gva, but not
+vice versa.
+
+These gvas may be backed using any method available to the host: anonymous
+memory, file backed memory, and device memory.  Memory might be paged by the
+host at any time.
+
+Events
+======
+
+The mmu is driven by events, some from the guest, some from the host.
+
+Guest generated events:
+- writes to control registers (especially cr3)
+- invlpg/invlpga instruction execution
+- access to missing or protected translations
+
+Host generated events:
+- changes in the gpa->hpa translation (either through gpa->hva changes or
+  through hva->hpa changes)
+- memory pressure (the shrinker)
+
+Shadow pages
+============
+
+The principal data structure is the shadow page, 'struct kvm_mmu_page'.  A
+shadow page contains 512 sptes, which can be either leaf or nonleaf sptes.  A
+shadow page may contain a mix of leaf and nonleaf sptes.
+
+A nonleaf spte allows the hardware mmu to reach the leaf pages and
+is not related to a translation directly.  It points to other shadow pages.
+
+A leaf spte corresponds to either one or two translations encoded into
+one paging structure entry.  These are always the lowest level of the
+translation stack, with optional higher level translations left to NPT/EPT.
+Leaf ptes point at guest pages.
+
+The following table shows translations encoded by leaf ptes, with higher-level
+translations in parentheses:
+
+ Non-nested guests:
+  nonpaging:     gpa->hpa
+  paging:        gva->gpa->hpa
+  paging, tdp:   (gva->)gpa->hpa
+ Nested guests:
+  non-tdp:       ngva->gpa->hpa  (*)
+  tdp:           (ngva->)ngpa->gpa->hpa
+
+(*) the guest hypervisor will encode the ngva->gpa translation into its page
+    tables if npt is not present
+
+Shadow pages contain the following information:
+  role.level:
+    The level in the shadow paging hierarchy that this shadow page belongs to.
+    1=4k sptes, 2=2M sptes, 3=1G sptes, etc.
+  role.direct:
+    If set, leaf sptes reachable from this page are for a linear range.
+    Examples include real mode translation, large guest pages backed by small
+    host pages, and gpa->hpa translations when NPT or EPT is active.
+    The linear range starts at (gfn << PAGE_SHIFT) and its size is determined
+    by role.level (2MB for first level, 1GB for second level, 0.5TB for third
+    level, 256TB for fourth level)
+    If clear, this page corresponds to a guest page table denoted by the gfn
+    field.
+  role.quadrant:
+    When role.cr4_pae=0, the guest uses 32-bit gptes while the host uses 64-bit
+    sptes.  That means a guest page table contains more ptes than the host,
+    so multiple shadow pages are needed to shadow one guest page.
+    For first-level shadow pages, role.quadrant can be 0 or 1 and denotes the
+    first or second 512-gpte block in the guest page table.  For second-level
+    page tables, each 32-bit gpte is converted to two 64-bit sptes
+    (since each first-level guest page is shadowed by two first-level
+    shadow pages) so role.quadrant takes values in the range 0..3.  Each
+    quadrant maps 1GB virtual address space.
+  role.access:
+    Inherited guest access permissions in the form uwx.  Note execute
+    permission is positive, not negative.
+  role.invalid:
+    The page is invalid and should not be used.  It is a root page that is
+    currently pinned (by a cpu hardware register pointing to it); once it is
+    unpinned it will be destroyed.
+  role.cr4_pae:
+    Contains the value of cr4.pae for which the page is valid (e.g. whether
+    32-bit or 64-bit gptes are in use).
+  role.cr4_nxe:
+    Contains the value of efer.nxe for which the page is valid.
+  role.cr0_wp:
+    Contains the value of cr0.wp for which the page is valid.
+  gfn:
+    Either the guest page table containing the translations shadowed by this
+    page, or the base page frame for linear translations.  See role.direct.
+  spt:
+    A pageful of 64-bit sptes containing the translations for this page.
+    Accessed by both kvm and hardware.
+    The page pointed to by spt will have its page->private pointing back
+    at the shadow page structure.
+    sptes in spt point either at guest pages, or at lower-level shadow pages.
+    Specifically, if sp1 and sp2 are shadow pages, then sp1->spt[n] may point
+    at __pa(sp2->spt).  sp2 will point back at sp1 through parent_pte.
+    The spt array forms a DAG structure with the shadow page as a node, and
+    guest pages as leaves.
+  gfns:
+    An array of 512 guest frame numbers, one for each present pte.  Used to
+    perform a reverse map from a pte to a gfn.
+  slot_bitmap:
+    A bitmap containing one bit per memory slot.  If the page contains a pte
+    mapping a page from memory slot n, then bit n of slot_bitmap will be set
+    (if a page is aliased among several slots, then it is not guaranteed that
+    all slots will be marked).
+    Used during dirty logging to avoid scanning a shadow page if none if its
+    pages need tracking.
+  root_count:
+    A counter keeping track of how many hardware registers (guest cr3 or
+    pdptrs) are now pointing at the page.  While this counter is nonzero, the
+    page cannot be destroyed.  See role.invalid.
+  multimapped:
+    Whether there exist multiple sptes pointing at this page.
+  parent_pte/parent_ptes:
+    If multimapped is zero, parent_pte points at the single spte that points at
+    this page's spt.  Otherwise, parent_ptes points at a data structure
+    with a list of parent_ptes.
+  unsync:
+    If true, then the translations in this page may not match the guest's
+    translation.  This is equivalent to the state of the tlb when a pte is
+    changed but before the tlb entry is flushed.  Accordingly, unsync ptes
+    are synchronized when the guest executes invlpg or flushes its tlb by
+    other means.  Valid for leaf pages.
+  unsync_children:
+    How many sptes in the page point at pages that are unsync (or have
+    unsynchronized children).
+  unsync_child_bitmap:
+    A bitmap indicating which sptes in spt point (directly or indirectly) at
+    pages that may be unsynchronized.  Used to quickly locate all unsychronized
+    pages reachable from a given page.
+
+Reverse map
+===========
+
+The mmu maintains a reverse mapping whereby all ptes mapping a page can be
+reached given its gfn.  This is used, for example, when swapping out a page.
+
+Synchronized and unsynchronized pages
+=====================================
+
+The guest uses two events to synchronize its tlb and page tables: tlb flushes
+and page invalidations (invlpg).
+
+A tlb flush means that we need to synchronize all sptes reachable from the
+guest's cr3.  This is expensive, so we keep all guest page tables write
+protected, and synchronize sptes to gptes when a gpte is written.
+
+A special case is when a guest page table is reachable from the current
+guest cr3.  In this case, the guest is obliged to issue an invlpg instruction
+before using the translation.  We take advantage of that by removing write
+protection from the guest page, and allowing the guest to modify it freely.
+We synchronize modified gptes when the guest invokes invlpg.  This reduces
+the amount of emulation we have to do when the guest modifies multiple gptes,
+or when the a guest page is no longer used as a page table and is used for
+random guest data.
+
+As a side effect we have to resynchronize all reachable unsynchronized shadow
+pages on a tlb flush.
+
+
+Reaction to events
+==================
+
+- guest page fault (or npt page fault, or ept violation)
+
+This is the most complicated event.  The cause of a page fault can be:
+
+  - a true guest fault (the guest translation won't allow the access) (*)
+  - access to a missing translation
+  - access to a protected translation
+    - when logging dirty pages, memory is write protected
+    - synchronized shadow pages are write protected (*)
+  - access to untranslatable memory (mmio)
+
+  (*) not applicable in direct mode
+
+Handling a page fault is performed as follows:
+
+ - if needed, walk the guest page tables to determine the guest translation
+   (gva->gpa or ngpa->gpa)
+   - if permissions are insufficient, reflect the fault back to the guest
+ - determine the host page
+   - if this is an mmio request, there is no host page; call the emulator
+     to emulate the instruction instead
+ - walk the shadow page table to find the spte for the translation,
+   instantiating missing intermediate page tables as necessary
+ - try to unsynchronize the page
+   - if successful, we can let the guest continue and modify the gpte
+ - emulate the instruction
+   - if failed, unshadow the page and let the guest continue
+ - update any translations that were modified by the instruction
+
+invlpg handling:
+
+  - walk the shadow page hierarchy and drop affected translations
+  - try to reinstantiate the indicated translation in the hope that the
+    guest will use it in the near future
+
+Guest control register updates:
+
+- mov to cr3
+  - look up new shadow roots
+  - synchronize newly reachable shadow pages
+
+- mov to cr0/cr4/efer
+  - set up mmu context for new paging mode
+  - look up new shadow roots
+  - synchronize newly reachable shadow pages
+
+Host translation updates:
+
+  - mmu notifier called with updated hva
+  - look up affected sptes through reverse map
+  - drop (or update) translations
+
+Further reading
+===============
+
+- NPT presentation from KVM Forum 2008
+  http://www.linux-kvm.org/wiki/images/c/c8/KvmForum2008%24kdf2008_21.pdf
+

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt

@@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Tips & Tricks
 * Drew Scott Daniels observed: "I don't know why, but when I decrease the number
 * Drew Scott Daniels observed: "I don't know why, but when I decrease the number
   of colours that my display uses it consumes less battery power. I've seen
   of colours that my display uses it consumes less battery power. I've seen
   this on powerbooks too. I hope that this is a piece of information that
   this on powerbooks too. I hope that this is a piece of information that
-  might be useful to the Laptop Mode patch or it's users."
+  might be useful to the Laptop Mode patch or its users."
 
 
 * In syslog.conf, you can prefix entries with a dash ``-'' to omit syncing the
 * In syslog.conf, you can prefix entries with a dash ``-'' to omit syncing the
   file after every logging. When you're using laptop-mode and your disk doesn't
   file after every logging. When you're using laptop-mode and your disk doesn't

+ 49 - 17
Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt

@@ -292,13 +292,13 @@ sysfs notes:
 
 
 		Warning: when in NVRAM mode, the volume up/down/mute
 		Warning: when in NVRAM mode, the volume up/down/mute
 		keys are synthesized according to changes in the mixer,
 		keys are synthesized according to changes in the mixer,
-		so you have to use volume up or volume down to unmute,
-		as per the ThinkPad volume mixer user interface.  When
-		in ACPI event mode, volume up/down/mute are reported as
-		separate events, but this behaviour may be corrected in
-		future releases of this driver, in which case the
-		ThinkPad volume mixer user interface semantics will be
-		enforced.
+		which uses a single volume up or volume down hotkey
+		press to unmute, as per the ThinkPad volume mixer user
+		interface.  When in ACPI event mode, volume up/down/mute
+		events are reported by the firmware and can behave
+		differently (and that behaviour changes with firmware
+		version -- not just with firmware models -- as well as
+		OSI(Linux) state).
 
 
 	hotkey_poll_freq:
 	hotkey_poll_freq:
 		frequency in Hz for hot key polling. It must be between
 		frequency in Hz for hot key polling. It must be between
@@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ sysfs notes:
 		will cause hot key presses that require NVRAM polling
 		will cause hot key presses that require NVRAM polling
 		to never be reported.
 		to never be reported.
 
 
-		Setting hotkey_poll_freq too low will cause repeated
+		Setting hotkey_poll_freq too low may cause repeated
 		pressings of the same hot key to be misreported as a
 		pressings of the same hot key to be misreported as a
 		single key press, or to not even be detected at all.
 		single key press, or to not even be detected at all.
 		The recommended polling frequency is 10Hz.
 		The recommended polling frequency is 10Hz.
@@ -397,6 +397,7 @@ ACPI	Scan
 event	code	Key		Notes
 event	code	Key		Notes
 
 
 0x1001	0x00	FN+F1		-
 0x1001	0x00	FN+F1		-
+
 0x1002	0x01	FN+F2		IBM: battery (rare)
 0x1002	0x01	FN+F2		IBM: battery (rare)
 				Lenovo: Screen lock
 				Lenovo: Screen lock
 
 
@@ -404,7 +405,8 @@ event	code	Key		Notes
 				this hot key, even with hot keys
 				this hot key, even with hot keys
 				disabled or with Fn+F3 masked
 				disabled or with Fn+F3 masked
 				off
 				off
-				IBM: screen lock
+				IBM: screen lock, often turns
+				off the ThinkLight as side-effect
 				Lenovo: battery
 				Lenovo: battery
 
 
 0x1004	0x03	FN+F4		Sleep button (ACPI sleep button
 0x1004	0x03	FN+F4		Sleep button (ACPI sleep button
@@ -433,7 +435,8 @@ event	code	Key		Notes
 				Do you feel lucky today?
 				Do you feel lucky today?
 
 
 0x1008	0x07	FN+F8		IBM: toggle screen expand
 0x1008	0x07	FN+F8		IBM: toggle screen expand
-				Lenovo: configure UltraNav
+				Lenovo: configure UltraNav,
+				or toggle screen expand
 
 
 0x1009	0x08	FN+F9		-
 0x1009	0x08	FN+F9		-
 	..	..		..
 	..	..		..
@@ -444,7 +447,7 @@ event	code	Key		Notes
 				either through the ACPI event,
 				either through the ACPI event,
 				or through a hotkey event.
 				or through a hotkey event.
 				The firmware may refuse to
 				The firmware may refuse to
-				generate further FN+F4 key
+				generate further FN+F12 key
 				press events until a S3 or S4
 				press events until a S3 or S4
 				ACPI sleep cycle is performed,
 				ACPI sleep cycle is performed,
 				or some time passes.
 				or some time passes.
@@ -512,15 +515,19 @@ events for switches:
 SW_RFKILL_ALL	T60 and later hardware rfkill rocker switch
 SW_RFKILL_ALL	T60 and later hardware rfkill rocker switch
 SW_TABLET_MODE	Tablet ThinkPads HKEY events 0x5009 and 0x500A
 SW_TABLET_MODE	Tablet ThinkPads HKEY events 0x5009 and 0x500A
 
 
-Non hot-key ACPI HKEY event map:
+Non hotkey ACPI HKEY event map:
+-------------------------------
+
+Events that are not propagated by the driver, except for legacy
+compatibility purposes when hotkey_report_mode is set to 1:
+
 0x5001		Lid closed
 0x5001		Lid closed
 0x5002		Lid opened
 0x5002		Lid opened
 0x5009		Tablet swivel: switched to tablet mode
 0x5009		Tablet swivel: switched to tablet mode
 0x500A		Tablet swivel: switched to normal mode
 0x500A		Tablet swivel: switched to normal mode
 0x7000		Radio Switch may have changed state
 0x7000		Radio Switch may have changed state
 
 
-The above events are not propagated by the driver, except for legacy
-compatibility purposes when hotkey_report_mode is set to 1.
+Events that are never propagated by the driver:
 
 
 0x2304		System is waking up from suspend to undock
 0x2304		System is waking up from suspend to undock
 0x2305		System is waking up from suspend to eject bay
 0x2305		System is waking up from suspend to eject bay
@@ -528,14 +535,39 @@ compatibility purposes when hotkey_report_mode is set to 1.
 0x2405		System is waking up from hibernation to eject bay
 0x2405		System is waking up from hibernation to eject bay
 0x5010		Brightness level changed/control event
 0x5010		Brightness level changed/control event
 
 
-The above events are never propagated by the driver.
+Events that are propagated by the driver to userspace:
 
 
+0x2313		ALARM: System is waking up from suspend because
+		the battery is nearly empty
+0x2413		ALARM: System is waking up from hibernation because
+		the battery is nearly empty
 0x3003		Bay ejection (see 0x2x05) complete, can sleep again
 0x3003		Bay ejection (see 0x2x05) complete, can sleep again
+0x3006		Bay hotplug request (hint to power up SATA link when
+		the optical drive tray is ejected)
 0x4003		Undocked (see 0x2x04), can sleep again
 0x4003		Undocked (see 0x2x04), can sleep again
 0x500B		Tablet pen inserted into its storage bay
 0x500B		Tablet pen inserted into its storage bay
 0x500C		Tablet pen removed from its storage bay
 0x500C		Tablet pen removed from its storage bay
-
-The above events are propagated by the driver.
+0x6011		ALARM: battery is too hot
+0x6012		ALARM: battery is extremely hot
+0x6021		ALARM: a sensor is too hot
+0x6022		ALARM: a sensor is extremely hot
+0x6030		System thermal table changed
+
+Battery nearly empty alarms are a last resort attempt to get the
+operating system to hibernate or shutdown cleanly (0x2313), or shutdown
+cleanly (0x2413) before power is lost.  They must be acted upon, as the
+wake up caused by the firmware will have negated most safety nets...
+
+When any of the "too hot" alarms happen, according to Lenovo the user
+should suspend or hibernate the laptop (and in the case of battery
+alarms, unplug the AC adapter) to let it cool down.  These alarms do
+signal that something is wrong, they should never happen on normal
+operating conditions.
+
+The "extremely hot" alarms are emergencies.  According to Lenovo, the
+operating system is to force either an immediate suspend or hibernate
+cycle, or a system shutdown.  Obviously, something is very wrong if this
+happens.
 
 
 Compatibility notes:
 Compatibility notes:
 
 

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/lguest/lguest.c

@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ static u8 *get_feature_bits(struct device *dev)
  * Launcher virtual with an offset.
  * Launcher virtual with an offset.
  *
  *
  * This can be tough to get your head around, but usually it just means that we
  * This can be tough to get your head around, but usually it just means that we
- * use these trivial conversion functions when the Guest gives us it's
+ * use these trivial conversion functions when the Guest gives us its
  * "physical" addresses:
  * "physical" addresses:
  */
  */
 static void *from_guest_phys(unsigned long addr)
 static void *from_guest_phys(unsigned long addr)

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/md.txt

@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ raid_disks != 0.
 
 
 Then uninitialized devices can be added with ADD_NEW_DISK.  The
 Then uninitialized devices can be added with ADD_NEW_DISK.  The
 structure passed to ADD_NEW_DISK must specify the state of the device
 structure passed to ADD_NEW_DISK must specify the state of the device
-and it's role in the array.
+and its role in the array.
 
 
 Once started with RUN_ARRAY, uninitialized spares can be added with
 Once started with RUN_ARRAY, uninitialized spares can be added with
 HOT_ADD_DISK.
 HOT_ADD_DISK.

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/netlabel/lsm_interface.txt

@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ Depending on the exact configuration, translation between the network packet
 label and the internal LSM security identifier can be time consuming.  The
 label and the internal LSM security identifier can be time consuming.  The
 NetLabel label mapping cache is a caching mechanism which can be used to
 NetLabel label mapping cache is a caching mechanism which can be used to
 sidestep much of this overhead once a mapping has been established.  Once the
 sidestep much of this overhead once a mapping has been established.  Once the
-LSM has received a packet, used NetLabel to decode it's security attributes,
+LSM has received a packet, used NetLabel to decode its security attributes,
 and translated the security attributes into a LSM internal identifier the LSM
 and translated the security attributes into a LSM internal identifier the LSM
 can use the NetLabel caching functions to associate the LSM internal
 can use the NetLabel caching functions to associate the LSM internal
 identifier with the network packet's label.  This means that in the future
 identifier with the network packet's label.  This means that in the future

+ 212 - 0
Documentation/networking/caif/Linux-CAIF.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,212 @@
+Linux CAIF
+===========
+copyright (C) ST-Ericsson AB 2010
+Author: Sjur Brendeland/ sjur.brandeland@stericsson.com
+License terms: GNU General Public License (GPL) version 2
+
+
+Introduction
+------------
+CAIF is a MUX protocol used by ST-Ericsson cellular modems for
+communication between Modem and host. The host processes can open virtual AT
+channels, initiate GPRS Data connections, Video channels and Utility Channels.
+The Utility Channels are general purpose pipes between modem and host.
+
+ST-Ericsson modems support a number of transports between modem
+and host. Currently, UART and Loopback are available for Linux.
+
+
+Architecture:
+------------
+The implementation of CAIF is divided into:
+* CAIF Socket Layer, Kernel API, and  Net Device.
+* CAIF Core Protocol Implementation
+* CAIF Link Layer, implemented as NET devices.
+
+
+  RTNL
+   !
+   !	 +------+   +------+   +------+
+   !	+------+!  +------+!  +------+!
+   !	! Sock !!  !Kernel!!  ! Net  !!
+   !	! API  !+  ! API  !+  ! Dev  !+	  <- CAIF Client APIs
+   !	+------+   +------!   +------+
+   !	   !	      !		 !
+   !	   +----------!----------+
+   !		   +------+		  <- CAIF Protocol Implementation
+   +------->	   ! CAIF !
+		   ! Core !
+		   +------+
+	     +--------!--------+
+	     !		       !
+	  +------+	    +-----+
+	  !    	 !	    ! TTY !	  <- Link Layer (Net Devices)
+	  +------+	    +-----+
+
+
+Using the Kernel API
+----------------------
+The Kernel API is used for accessing CAIF channels from the
+kernel.
+The user of the API has to implement two callbacks for receive
+and control.
+The receive callback gives a CAIF packet as a SKB. The control
+callback will
+notify of channel initialization complete, and flow-on/flow-
+off.
+
+
+  struct caif_device caif_dev = {
+    .caif_config = {
+     .name = "MYDEV"
+     .type = CAIF_CHTY_AT
+    }
+   .receive_cb = my_receive,
+   .control_cb = my_control,
+  };
+  caif_add_device(&caif_dev);
+  caif_transmit(&caif_dev, skb);
+
+See the caif_kernel.h for details about the CAIF kernel API.
+
+
+I M P L E M E N T A T I O N
+===========================
+===========================
+
+CAIF Core Protocol Layer
+=========================================
+
+CAIF Core layer implements the CAIF protocol as defined by ST-Ericsson.
+It implements the CAIF protocol stack in a layered approach, where
+each layer described in the specification is implemented as a separate layer.
+The architecture is inspired by the design patterns "Protocol Layer" and
+"Protocol Packet".
+
+== CAIF structure ==
+The Core CAIF implementation contains:
+      -	Simple implementation of CAIF.
+      -	Layered architecture (a la Streams), each layer in the CAIF
+	specification is implemented in a separate c-file.
+      -	Clients must implement PHY layer to access physical HW
+	with receive and transmit functions.
+      -	Clients must call configuration function to add PHY layer.
+      -	Clients must implement CAIF layer to consume/produce
+	CAIF payload with receive and transmit functions.
+      -	Clients must call configuration function to add and connect the
+	Client layer.
+      - When receiving / transmitting CAIF Packets (cfpkt), ownership is passed
+	to the called function (except for framing layers' receive functions
+	or if a transmit function returns an error, in which case the caller
+	must free the packet).
+
+Layered Architecture
+--------------------
+The CAIF protocol can be divided into two parts: Support functions and Protocol
+Implementation. The support functions include:
+
+      - CFPKT CAIF Packet. Implementation of CAIF Protocol Packet. The
+	CAIF Packet has functions for creating, destroying and adding content
+	and for adding/extracting header and trailers to protocol packets.
+
+      - CFLST CAIF list implementation.
+
+      - CFGLUE CAIF Glue. Contains OS Specifics, such as memory
+	allocation, endianness, etc.
+
+The CAIF Protocol implementation contains:
+
+      - CFCNFG CAIF Configuration layer. Configures the CAIF Protocol
+	Stack and provides a Client interface for adding Link-Layer and
+	Driver interfaces on top of the CAIF Stack.
+
+      - CFCTRL CAIF Control layer. Encodes and Decodes control messages
+	such as enumeration and channel setup. Also matches request and
+	response messages.
+
+      - CFSERVL General CAIF Service Layer functionality; handles flow
+	control and remote shutdown requests.
+
+      - CFVEI CAIF VEI layer. Handles CAIF AT Channels on VEI (Virtual
+        External Interface). This layer encodes/decodes VEI frames.
+
+      - CFDGML CAIF Datagram layer. Handles CAIF Datagram layer (IP
+	traffic), encodes/decodes Datagram frames.
+
+      - CFMUX CAIF Mux layer. Handles multiplexing between multiple
+	physical bearers and multiple channels such as VEI, Datagram, etc.
+	The MUX keeps track of the existing CAIF Channels and
+	Physical Instances and selects the apropriate instance based
+	on Channel-Id and Physical-ID.
+
+      - CFFRML CAIF Framing layer. Handles Framing i.e. Frame length
+	and frame checksum.
+
+      - CFSERL CAIF Serial layer. Handles concatenation/split of frames
+	into CAIF Frames with correct length.
+
+
+
+		    +---------+
+		    | Config  |
+		    | CFCNFG  |
+		    +---------+
+			 !
+    +---------+	    +---------+	    +---------+
+    |	AT    |	    | Control |	    | Datagram|
+    | CFVEIL  |	    | CFCTRL  |	    | CFDGML  |
+    +---------+	    +---------+	    +---------+
+	   \_____________!______________/
+			 !
+		    +---------+
+		    |	MUX   |
+		    |	      |
+		    +---------+
+		    _____!_____
+		   /	       \
+	    +---------+	    +---------+
+	    | CFFRML  |	    | CFFRML  |
+	    | Framing |	    | Framing |
+	    +---------+	    +---------+
+		 !		!
+	    +---------+	    +---------+
+	    |         |	    | Serial  |
+	    |	      |	    | CFSERL  |
+	    +---------+	    +---------+
+
+
+In this layered approach the following "rules" apply.
+      - All layers embed the same structure "struct cflayer"
+      - A layer does not depend on any other layer's private data.
+      - Layers are stacked by setting the pointers
+		  layer->up , layer->dn
+      -	In order to send data upwards, each layer should do
+		 layer->up->receive(layer->up, packet);
+      - In order to send data downwards, each layer should do
+		 layer->dn->transmit(layer->dn, packet);
+
+
+Linux Driver Implementation
+===========================
+
+Linux GPRS Net Device and CAIF socket are implemented on top of the
+CAIF Core protocol. The Net device and CAIF socket have an instance of
+'struct cflayer', just like the CAIF Core protocol stack.
+Net device and Socket implement the 'receive()' function defined by
+'struct cflayer', just like the rest of the CAIF stack. In this way, transmit and
+receive of packets is handled as by the rest of the layers: the 'dn->transmit()'
+function is called in order to transmit data.
+
+The layer on top of the CAIF Core implementation is
+sometimes referred to as the "Client layer".
+
+
+Configuration of Link Layer
+---------------------------
+The Link Layer is implemented as Linux net devices (struct net_device).
+Payload handling and registration is done using standard Linux mechanisms.
+
+The CAIF Protocol relies on a loss-less link layer without implementing
+retransmission. This implies that packet drops must not happen.
+Therefore a flow-control mechanism is implemented where the physical
+interface can initiate flow stop for all CAIF Channels.

+ 109 - 0
Documentation/networking/caif/README

@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+Copyright (C) ST-Ericsson AB 2010
+Author: Sjur Brendeland/ sjur.brandeland@stericsson.com
+License terms: GNU General Public License (GPL) version 2
+---------------------------------------------------------
+
+=== Start ===
+If you have compiled CAIF for modules do:
+
+$modprobe crc_ccitt
+$modprobe caif
+$modprobe caif_socket
+$modprobe chnl_net
+
+
+=== Preparing the setup with a STE modem ===
+
+If you are working on integration of CAIF you should make sure
+that the kernel is built with module support.
+
+There are some things that need to be tweaked to get the host TTY correctly
+set up to talk to the modem.
+Since the CAIF stack is running in the kernel and we want to use the existing
+TTY, we are installing our physical serial driver as a line discipline above
+the TTY device.
+
+To achieve this we need to install the N_CAIF ldisc from user space.
+The benefit is that we can hook up to any TTY.
+
+The use of Start-of-frame-extension (STX) must also be set as
+module parameter "ser_use_stx".
+
+Normally Frame Checksum is always used on UART, but this is also provided as a
+module parameter "ser_use_fcs".
+
+$ modprobe caif_serial ser_ttyname=/dev/ttyS0 ser_use_stx=yes
+$ ifconfig caif_ttyS0 up
+
+PLEASE NOTE: 	There is a limitation in Android shell.
+		It only accepts one argument to insmod/modprobe!
+
+=== Trouble shooting ===
+
+There are debugfs parameters provided for serial communication.
+/sys/kernel/debug/caif_serial/<tty-name>/
+
+* ser_state:   Prints the bit-mask status where
+  - 0x02 means SENDING, this is a transient state.
+  - 0x10 means FLOW_OFF_SENT, i.e. the previous frame has not been sent
+	and is blocking further send operation. Flow OFF has been propagated
+	to all CAIF Channels using this TTY.
+
+* tty_status: Prints the bit-mask tty status information
+  - 0x01 - tty->warned is on.
+  - 0x02 - tty->low_latency is on.
+  - 0x04 - tty->packed is on.
+  - 0x08 - tty->flow_stopped is on.
+  - 0x10 - tty->hw_stopped is on.
+  - 0x20 - tty->stopped is on.
+
+* last_tx_msg: Binary blob Prints the last transmitted frame.
+	This can be printed with
+	$od --format=x1 /sys/kernel/debug/caif_serial/<tty>/last_rx_msg.
+	The first two tx messages sent look like this. Note: The initial
+	byte 02 is start of frame extension (STX) used for re-syncing
+	upon errors.
+
+  - Enumeration:
+        0000000  02 05 00 00 03 01 d2 02
+                 |  |     |  |  |  |
+                 STX(1)   |  |  |  |
+                    Length(2)|  |  |
+                          Control Channel(1)
+                             Command:Enumeration(1)
+                                Link-ID(1)
+                                    Checksum(2)
+  - Channel Setup:
+        0000000  02 07 00 00 00 21 a1 00 48 df
+                 |  |     |  |  |  |  |  |
+                 STX(1)   |  |  |  |  |  |
+                    Length(2)|  |  |  |  |
+                          Control Channel(1)
+                             Command:Channel Setup(1)
+                                Channel Type(1)
+                                    Priority and Link-ID(1)
+				      Endpoint(1)
+					  Checksum(2)
+
+* last_rx_msg: Prints the last transmitted frame.
+	The RX messages for LinkSetup look almost identical but they have the
+	bit 0x20 set in the command bit, and Channel Setup has added one byte
+	before Checksum containing Channel ID.
+	NOTE: Several CAIF Messages might be concatenated. The maximum debug
+	buffer size is 128 bytes.
+
+== Error Scenarios:
+- last_tx_msg contains channel setup message and last_rx_msg is empty ->
+  The host seems to be able to send over the UART, at least the CAIF ldisc get
+  notified that sending is completed.
+
+- last_tx_msg contains enumeration message and last_rx_msg is empty ->
+  The host is not able to send the message from UART, the tty has not been
+  able to complete the transmit operation.
+
+- if /sys/kernel/debug/caif_serial/<tty>/tty_status is non-zero there
+  might be problems transmitting over UART.
+  E.g. host and modem wiring is not correct you will typically see
+  tty_status = 0x10 (hw_stopped) and ser_state = 0x10 (FLOW_OFF_SENT).
+  You will probably see the enumeration message in last_tx_message
+  and empty last_rx_message.

+ 1 - 1
Documentation/networking/ifenslave.c

@@ -756,7 +756,7 @@ static int enslave(char *master_ifname, char *slave_ifname)
 		 */
 		 */
 		if (abi_ver < 1) {
 		if (abi_ver < 1) {
 			/* For old ABI, the master needs to be
 			/* For old ABI, the master needs to be
-			 * down before setting it's hwaddr
+			 * down before setting its hwaddr
 			 */
 			 */
 			res = set_if_down(master_ifname, master_flags.ifr_flags);
 			res = set_if_down(master_ifname, master_flags.ifr_flags);
 			if (res) {
 			if (res) {

+ 31 - 0
Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt

@@ -588,6 +588,37 @@ ip_local_port_range - 2 INTEGERS
 	(i.e. by default) range 1024-4999 is enough to issue up to
 	(i.e. by default) range 1024-4999 is enough to issue up to
 	2000 connections per second to systems supporting timestamps.
 	2000 connections per second to systems supporting timestamps.
 
 
+ip_local_reserved_ports - list of comma separated ranges
+	Specify the ports which are reserved for known third-party
+	applications. These ports will not be used by automatic port
+	assignments (e.g. when calling connect() or bind() with port
+	number 0). Explicit port allocation behavior is unchanged.
+
+	The format used for both input and output is a comma separated
+	list of ranges (e.g. "1,2-4,10-10" for ports 1, 2, 3, 4 and
+	10). Writing to the file will clear all previously reserved
+	ports and update the current list with the one given in the
+	input.
+
+	Note that ip_local_port_range and ip_local_reserved_ports
+	settings are independent and both are considered by the kernel
+	when determining which ports are available for automatic port
+	assignments.
+
+	You can reserve ports which are not in the current
+	ip_local_port_range, e.g.:
+
+	$ cat /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_local_port_range
+	32000	61000
+	$ cat /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_local_reserved_ports
+	8080,9148
+
+	although this is redundant. However such a setting is useful
+	if later the port range is changed to a value that will
+	include the reserved ports.
+
+	Default: Empty
+
 ip_nonlocal_bind - BOOLEAN
 ip_nonlocal_bind - BOOLEAN
 	If set, allows processes to bind() to non-local IP addresses,
 	If set, allows processes to bind() to non-local IP addresses,
 	which can be quite useful - but may break some applications.
 	which can be quite useful - but may break some applications.

Some files were not shown because too many files changed in this diff